You are on page 1of 161

Solutions Manual

Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics


1st Edition

Gary L. Gray
The Pennsylvania State University

Francesco Costanzo
The Pennsylvania State University

Michael E. Plesha
University of WisconsinMadison

With the assistance of:


Chris Punshon
Andrew J. Miller
Justin High
Chris OBrien
Chandan Kumar
Joseph Wyne

Version: August 10, 2009

The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc.


Copyright 20022010
Gary L. Gray, Francesco Costanzo, and Michael E. Plesha

This solutions manual, in any print or electronic form, remains the property of McGraw-Hill, Inc. It
may be used and/or possessed only by permission of McGraw-Hill, and must be surrendered upon
request of McGraw-Hill. Any duplication or distribution, either in print or electronic form, without
the permission of McGraw-Hill, is prohibited.
Dynamics 1e 3

Important Information about


this Solutions Manual
Even though this solutions manual is nearly complete, we encourage you to visit

http://www.mhhe.com/pgc

often to obtain the most up-to-date version. In particular, as of July 30, 2009, please note the following:

_ The solutions for Chapters 1 and 2 have been accuracy checked and have been edited by us. They are
in their final form.

_ The solutions for Chapters 4 and 7 have been accuracy checked and should be error free. We will be
adding some additional detail to these solutions in the coming weeks.

_ The solutions for Chapters 3, 6, 8, and 9 are being accuracy checked and the accuracy checked versions
should be available by the end of August 2009. We will be adding some additional detail to these
solutions in the coming weeks.

_ The solutions for Chapter 10 should be available in their entirety by the end of August 2009.

All of the figures in Chapters 610 are in color. Color will be added to the figures in Chapters 15 over the
coming weeks.

Contact the Authors


If you find any errors and/or have questions concerning a solution, please do not hesitate to contact the
authors and editors via email at:

dyn_solns@email.esm.psu.edu

We welcome your input.

August 10, 2009


4 Solutions Manual

Accuracy of Numbers in Calculations


Throughout this solutions manual, we will generally assume that the data given for problems is accurate to
3 significant digits. When calculations are performed, all intermediate numerical results are reported to 4
significant digits. Final answers are usually reported with 3 significant digits. If you verify the calculations in
this solutions manual using the rounded intermediate numerical results that are reported, you should obtain
the final answers that are reported to 3 significant digits.

August 10, 2009


1064 Solutions Manual

Chapter 8 Solutions
Problem 8.1

At the instant shown, the centers of the two identical uniform disks A and
B are moving to the right with the same speed v0 . In addition, disk A is
rolling clockwise with an angular speed !0 while disk B has a backspin with
angular speed equal to !0 . Letting TA and TB be the kinetic energies of A and
B, respectively, state which of the following statements is true and why: (a)
TA < TB ; (b) TA D TB ; (c) TA > TB .

Solution
At the instant shown, the kinetic energies of A and B are equal to one another.

Explanation. The kinetic energy of a rigid body in planar motion is given by

T D 21 mv02 12 IG !02 ;

where v0 is the speed of the mass center and IG is the mass moment of inertia with respect to the mass center.
Observe that the quantities that contribute to the kinetic energy are the same for bodies A and B. The fact
that the direction of rotation of A os opposite to the direction of rotation of B is irrelevant from the viewpoint
of kinetic energy calculations.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1065

Problem 8.2

At the instant shown, the centers of the two identical uniform disks A and B, each with mass m and radius
R, are moving to the right with the same speed v0 D 4 m=s. In addition, disk A is rolling clockwise with
an angular speed !0 D 5 rad=s, while disk B has a backspin with angular speed !0 D 5 rad=s. Letting
m D 45 kg and R D 0:75 m, determine the kinetic energy of each disk.

Solution
Let C and D denote the mass centers of disks A and B, respectively. Then, applying the definition of kinetic
energy for a rigid body, for A we have
2
TA D 12 mA vC C 21 IC !A2 ;

and for B we have


2 2
TB D 12 mB vD C 21 ID !D :
Observing that mA D mB D m, vC D vD D v0 , and that !A D !0 D !B , IC D ID D 12 mR2 , we have

TA D TB D 518 J;

where we have used the following numerical data: m D 45 kg, v0 D 4 m=s, !0 D 5 rad=s, and R D 0:75 m.

August 10, 2009


1066 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.3

Two identical battering rams are mounted on their respective frames as shown.
Bars BC and AD are identical and pinned at B and C and at A and D, re-
spectively. Bars FO and HO are rigidly attached to the ram and are pinned
at O. At the instant shown, the mass centers of rams 1 and 2, at E and G,
respectively, are moving horizontally with speed v0 . Letting T1 and T2 be the
kinetic energies of rams 1 and 2, respectively, state which of the following
statements is true and why: (a) T1 < T2 ; (b) T1 D T2 ; (c) T1 > T2 .

Solution
Modeling the rams as rigid bodies, the kinetic energy of ram 2 is larger than the kinetic energy of ram 1.

Exaplanation. Recall that the kinetic energy of a rigid body has the following form:

T D 12 mv02 C 21 IG !02 ;

where m is the mass of the body, v0 is the speed of the center of mass of the body, IG is the mass moment of
inertia of the body about its mass center, and !0 is the angular speed of the body. Notice that ram 1 and ram
2 have the mass and the same mass moment of inertia. In addition, their mass centers have the same speed
and therefore their kinetic energies have the same terms 12 mv02 . Now observe that ram 1 is in curvilinear
translation and the therefore the contribution to the kinetic energy due to the bodys angular velocity is equal
to zero. By contrast, ram 2 does have a nonzero angular velocity and therefore its kinetic energy has a
corresponding nonzero contribution due to the kinetic energy.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1067

Problem 8.4

Two identical battering rams are mounted on their respective frames as shown. Bars BC and AD are
identical and pinned at B and C and at A and D, respectively. Bars FO and HO are rigidly attached to
the ram and are pinned at O. At the instant shown, the centers of mass of rams 1 and 2, at E and G,
respectively, are moving horizontally with a speed v0 D 20 ft=s. Treating the rams as slender bars with
length L D 10 ft and weight W D 1250 lb, and letting H D 3 ft, compute the kinetic energy of the two
rams.

Solution
The kinetic energy of ram 1 is given by
2 2
TR1 D 21 mR1 vE C 12 IE !R1 ;

where mR1 is the mass of ram 1, vE is the speed of the center of mass of ram 1, IE is the mass moment of
inertia of ram 1 relative to E, and !R1 is the angular speed of ram 1. Similarly, for ram 2 we have
2 2
TR2 D 12 mR2 vG C 12 IG !R2 ;

where mR2 is the mass of ram 2, vG is the speed of the center of mass of ram 2, IG is the mass moment of
inertia of ram 2 relative to G, and !R2 is the angular speed of ram 2.
Now, observe for ram 1 we have
1 2
mR1 D W=g D 38:82 slug; vE D v0 D 20:00 ft=s; IE D 12 .W =g/L D 323:5 slugft2 ; !R1 D 0;

where !R1 D 0 reflects the fact the motion of ram 1 is a translation, and where we have used the following
numerical values: W D 1250 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , and L D 10 ft.
For ram 2 we have

mR2 D W =g D 38:82 slug; vG D v0 D 20:00 ft=s;


v0
1
IG D 12 .W =g/L2 323:5 slugft2 ; !R2 D D 6:667 rad=s;
H
where !R2 D v0 =H reflects the fact that ram 2 in a fixed axis rotation about O, and where, in addition to the
numerical data listed earlier, we have used the fact that H D 3 ft.
In conclusion, substituting the numerical values just listed into the top two equations, we have

TR1 D 7760 ftlb and TR2 D 15;000 ftlb;

August 10, 2009


1068 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.5

A pendulum consists of a uniform disk A of diameter d D 0:15 m and mass mA D 0:35 kg attached at
the end of a uniform bar B of length L D 0:75 m and mass mB D 0:8 kg. At the instant shown, the
pendulum is swinging with an angular velocity ! D 0:24 rad=s clockwise. Determine the kinetic energy
of the pendulum at this instant, using Eq. (8.10) on p. 593.

Solution
The pendulum is undergoing a fixed axis rotation about O. Hence, the kinetic energy of the pendulum is

T D 21 IO ! 2 ;

where IO is the mass moment of inertia of the system about O and is therefore given by
2
IO D 1
12 mB L C mB . 21 L/2 C 12 mA . 21 d /2 C mA .L C 12 d /2 D 0:3892 kgm2 ;

where we have used the following numerical data: mA D 0:35 kg, mB D 0:8 kg, L D 0:75 m, and
d D 0:15 m.
Substituting the above numerical value for IO into the expression for the kinetic energy, and recalling
that ! D 0:24 rad=s, we have
T D 0:0112 J:

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1069

Problem 8.6

A 2570 lb car (this includes the weight of the wheels) is traveling on a horizontal flat road at 60 mph. If
each wheel has a diameter d D 24:3 in: and a mass moment of inertia with respect to its mass center equal
to 0:989 slugft2 , determine the kinetic energy of the car. Neglect the rotational energy of all parts of the
car except for the wheels.

Solution
The kinetic energy of the car is
T D 12 mv 2 C 4 1 2

2 IGw !w ;
where m D W =g D .2570 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 79:81 slug is the mass of the car, v D 60 mph D 88:00 ft=s is
the speed of the car, IGw D 0:989 slugft2 is the mass moment of inertia of each wheel relative to the wheels
mass center, and where !w is the angular speed of each wheel. Assuming rolling without slip, the angular
speed of each wheel is
!w D 2v=d D 86:91 rad=s;
where we have used the fact that d D 24:3 in: D 2:025 ft. Hence, using the given data, we have

T D 324;000 ftlb:

August 10, 2009


1070 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.7

In Example 7.2 on p. 560 we analyzed the forces acting on a test tube in


an ultra-centrifuge. Recalling that the center of mass G of the test tube was
assumed to be at a distance r D 0:0918 m from the centrifuges spin axis,
that the test tube had a mass m D 0:01 kg and a mass moment of inertia
IG D 2:82110 6 kgm2 , determine the kinetic energy of the test tube when it
is spun at ! D 60;000 rpm. In addition, if you were to convert the computed
kinetic energy to gravitational potential energy, at what height (expressed in
meters) relative to the ground could you lift a 10 kg weight?

Solution
The test tube is undergoing a fixed axis rotation about the axis of rotation of the centrifuge. Hence, the kinetic
energy of the test tube is
T D 21 IO ! 2 ; (1)
where O is the center of the path of point G and IO is the mass moment of inertia of the tube computed
about O. Using the parallel axis theorem, we have

IO D IG C mr 2 D 0:00008709 kgm2 ; (2)

where we have used the following numerical data: IG D 2:82110 6 kgm2 , m D 0:01 kg, and r D 0:0918 m.
Hence, using the given data, we have
T D 1719 J; (3)
which, when expressed to three significant figures, is

T D 1720 J:

Given a body of mass mB , the potential energy of such a body placed at a height h above the ground is
mB gh. Hence, setting such an energy amount equal to the computed kinetic energy, letting mB D 10:0 kg,
and solving for h gives
T
hD D 17:5 m;
mB g

where we have used the value of T in Eq. (3) and g D 9:81 m=s2 .

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1071

Problem 8.8

The uniform thin bars AB, BC, and CD have masses mAB D 2:3 kg, mBC D 3:2 kg, and mCD D 5:0 kg,
respectively. The connections at A; B; C , and D are pinned joints. Letting R D 0:75 m, L D 1:2 m, and
H D 1:55 m, and knowing that bar AB rotates at an angular velocity !AB D 4 rad=s, compute the kinetic
energy T of the system at the instant shown.

Solution
The kinetic energy of the system is the sum of the kinetic energy of each individual component of the system.
Bar AB is undegoing a fixed axis rotation about A. Hence, the kinetic energy of bar AB is
2
TAB D 12 IA !AB ; (1)
where IA is the mass moment of inertia of bar AB about A. Using the concept of instantaneous center of
rotation, we see that the motion of bar BC is a curvilinear translation. Hence, the speed of every point on the
bar BC is the same as the speed of point B. In turn, this means that the kinetic energy of bar BC is
TBC D 12 mBC .!AB R/2 ; (2)
where !AB R is the speed of point B. Next, we observe that bar CD is in a fixed axis rotation about point D.
Since the speed of point C must be equal to the speed of point B, we have that the angular speed of bar CD
is !CD D !AB .R=H /, so that the kinetic energy of bar CD is
R 2
 
1
TCD D 2 ID !AB ; (3)
H
where ID is the mass moment of inertia of bar CD about point D. The mass moments of inertia needed to
evaluate the above kinetic energies are
2
IA D 1
12 mAB R C mAB .R=2/2 D 0:4312 kgm2 (4)
and
2
ID D 1
12 mCD H C mCD .H=2/2 D 4:004 kgm2 ; (5)
where we have used the following numerical data: mAB D 2:3 kg, R D 0:75 m, mCD D 5:0 kg, and
H D 1:55 m. Hence, using Eqs. (1)(3), the total kinetic energy of the system is

1
T D ID R2 C H 2 .IA C mBC R2 /!AB
2
D 25:3 J;
2H 2
where, in addition to those in Eqs. (4) and (5), we have used the following numerical data: H D 1:55 m,
R D 0:75 m, mBC D 3:2 kg, and !AB D 4 rad=s.
August 10, 2009
1072 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.9

The weights of the uniform thin pin-connected bars AB, BC, and CD are WAB D 4 lb, WBC D 6:5 lb, and
WCD D 10 lb, respectively. Letting  D 47 , R D 2 ft, L D 3:5 ft, and H D 4:5 ft, and knowing that
bar AB rotates at an angular velocity !AB D 4 rad=s, compute the kinetic energy T of the system at the
instant shown.

Solution
The kinetic energy of the system is the sum of the kinetic energies of each individual component, i.e.,

T D TAB C TBC C TCD : (1)

Bars AB and CD are in fixed axis rotations about A and D respectively. Hence, letting G denote the mass
center of bar BC , we have
2 2 2 2
TAB D 12 IA !AB ; TBC D 12 mBC vG C 12 IG !BC ; and TCD D 21 ID !CD ; (2)

where IA is the mass moment of inertia of bar AB about A, IG is the mass moment of inertia of bar BC
about its own mass center G, and ID is the mass moment of inertia of bar CD about D, i.e.,
1 2 2 2
IA D 12 mAB R C mAB .R=2/ D 0:1656 slugft ; (3)
1 2 2
IG D 12 mBC L D 0:2061 slugft ; (4)
1 2 2 2
ID D 12 mCD H C mCD .H=2/ D 2:097 slugft ; (5)

where, recalling that the acceleration due to gravity is g D 32:2 ft=s2 , we have used the following nu-
merical data: mAB D WAB =g D .4 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:1242 slug, R D 2 ft, mBC D WBC =g D
.6:5 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:2019 slug, L D 3:5 ft, mCD D WCD =g D .10 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:3106 slug,
and H D 4:5 ft.
We now determine !BC , vG , and !CD . The position of vectors of B with relative to A, C relative to B,
and D relative to C are, respectively,

rEB=A D R |O; rEC =B D L {O; and rED=C D H.cos  {O sin  |O/: (6)

Then we have

vEB D !AB kO  rEB=A D R!AB {O; (7)


vEC D vEB C !BC kO  rEC =B D R!AB {O C !BC L |O; (8)
vED D vEC C !CD kO  rED=C D .H !CD sin  R!AB / {O C .L!BC C H !CD cos / |O: (9)

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1073

E which then implies


Since D is a fixed point, we must have vED D 0,
R cos  R
!BC D !AB D 2:131 rad=s and !CD D !AB D 2:431 rad=s; (10)
L sin  H sin 

where we have used the following numerical data: !AB D 4 rad=s, R D 2 ft, L D 3:5 ft, and  D 47 . Then,
using the first of Eqs. (10), we have that the velocity of G is

cos 
vEG D vEB C !BC kO  12 rEC =B D R!AB {O 1
2 R!AB sin  |O
 2 
2 2 2 1 cos 
) vG DR !AB 1C 4 2 D 77:91 ft2 =s2 ; (11)
sin 
where we have used some of the same numerical data listed earlier. Substituting Eq. (3) into the first of
Eq. (2) and recalling that !AB D 4 rad=s, we have

TAB D 1:325 ftlb: (12)

Substituting the numerical results in Eq. (4), the first of Eqs. (10), and Eq. (11) into the second of Eq. (2), we
have
TBC D 8:333 ftlb: (13)
Finally, substituting the numerical results in Eq. (5) and in the second of Eqs. (10), we have

TCD D 6:196 ftlb: (14)

Hence, summing the last three results, we have

T D 15:9 ftlb:

August 10, 2009


1074 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.10

The uniform slender bar AB has length L D 1:45 ft and weight WAB D 20 lb.
Rollers D and E, which are pinned at A and B, respectively, can be modeled
as two identical uniform disks, each with radius r D 1:5 in: and weight Wr D
0:35 lb. Rollers D and E roll without slip on the surface of a cylindrical bowl
with center at O and radius R D 1 ft. Determine the systems kinetic energy
when G (the center of mass of bar AB) moves with a speed v D 7 ft=s.

Solution
The kinetic energy of the system is
T D TAB C TD C TE ; (1)
where
2 2
TAB D 12 mAB vG C 12 IG !AB and TD D TE D 12 mr vA2 C 12 Ir !r2 ; (2)
where !AB is the angular speed of bar AB, IG is the mass moment of inertia of bar AB relative to its own
mass center G, vA is the speed of A, Ir is the mass moment of inertia of each roller about its own mass center,
and !r is the angular speed of each roller.
Observe that bar AB is in a fixed axis rotation about O. In addition, the distance dGO between points G
and O is q
dGO D .R r/2 .L=2/2 : (3)
Hence, we have
vG vG
!AB D Dp D 14:29 rad=s (4)
dGO .R r/2 .L=2/2
and
vG .R r/
vA D .R r/!AB D p D 12:50 ft=s; (5)
.R r/2 .L=2/2

where we have used the following numerical data: vG D 7 ft=s, R D 1 ft, r D 1:5 in: D 0:1250 ft, and
L D 1:45 ft. Recalling that each roller rolls without slip, we must have
vA
vA D r!r ) !r D D 100:0 rad=s: (6)
r
The needed mass moments of inertia are
2
IG D 1
12 mAB L D 0:1088 slugft2 and Ir D 21 mr r 2 D 84:9210 6
slugft2 ; (7)

where, in addition to the values of L and r that have been already listed, we have used the following nu-
merical data: mAB D .20 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:6211 slug and mr D .0:35 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:01087 slug.
Substituting the numerical values we have computed thus far, we can say that

T D 28:9 ftlb:

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1075

Problems 8.11 and 8.12

For the slider-crank mechanism shown, let L D 141 mm, R D 48:5 mm,
and H D 36:4 mm. In addition, observing that D is the center of mass of
the connecting rod, let the mass moment of inertia of the connecting rod be
ID D 0:00144 kgm2 and the mass of the connecting rod be m D 0:439 kg.

Problem 8.11 Letting !AB D 2500 rpm, compute the kinetic energy of the
connecting rod for  D 90 and for  D 180 .

Problem 8.12 Plot the kinetic energy of the connecting rod as a func-
tion of the crank angle  over one full cycle of the crank for !AB D 2500 rpm,
5000 rpm, and 7500 rpm.

Solution to 8.11
The kinetic energy of the connecting rod is
2 2
TBC D 12 mvD C 21 ID !BC ; (1)

where vD is the speed of the center of mass of the connecting rod, !BC is the angular velocity of the
connecting rod, and where ID is the mass moment of inertia of the connecting rod relative to its own mass
center. Using the results of Example 6.5 on p. 484 of the textbook, we have.

!AB sin 
!BC D p ; (2)
.L=R/2 cos2 

and      
H H sin 
vED D R!AB sin  1 {O C cos  1 C p |O : (3)
L L .L=R/2 cos2 
2
Recalling that vD D vED  vED , substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1), after simplification, we have
2 2 
ID sin2 
  
H HR sin 
TBC D 21 R2 !AB
2
2 2 2
C m 1 C m cos2  1 C p : (4)
L R cos  L L L2 R2 cos2 
evaluating the above expression, we have

TBC D90 D 25:3 J and TBC D180 D 35:4 J;

where we have used the following numerical data: R D 48:5 mm D 48:5010 3 m, !AB D 2500 rpm D
261:8 rad=s, ID D 0:00144 kgm2 , L D 141 mm D 141:010 3 m, m D 0:439 kg, and H D 36:4 mm D
36:4010 3 m.

August 10, 2009


1076 Solutions Manual

Solution to 8.12
This problem simply requires plots of the function derived in Eq. (4) of the solution to Problem 8.11. The
plots shown below were obtained with the following Mathematica code.
2

1 # D Sin!" 2 H 2 H Sin!"
In[1]:= KE ! R 2 2AB &m %1 & Sin!" 2 & Cos!" 2 1& ;
2 L 2 % R 2 Cos!" 2 L
L2
L % Cos!" 2
R2

Parameters ! #L ' , # D ' 0.00144 , m ' 0.439 $;


141.0 48.5 36.4
, R' , H'
1000.0 1000.0 1000.0

Plot%KE &. AB ' &. Parameters, ', 0, 2 (, AxesLabel ' )"", "T BC "*+
2500 ( 2

60.0

Plot%KE &. AB ' &. Parameters, ', 0, 2 (, AxesLabel ' )"", "T BC "*+
5000 ( 2

60.0

Plot%KE &. AB ' &. Parameters, ', 0, 2 (, AxesLabel ' )"", "T BC "*+
7500 ( 2

60.0

TBC ; AB #2500 rpm

36
34
32
30
28

1 2 3 4 5 6
TBC ; AB #5000 rpm

140

130

120


1 2 3 4 5 6

TBC ; AB #7500 rpm

320

300

280

260


1 2 3 4 5 6

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1077

Problems 8.13 and 8.14

A 14 lb bowling ball is thrown onto a lane with a backspin angular speed


!0 D 10 rad=s and forward velocity v0 D 17 mph. After a few seconds, the
ball starts rolling without slip and moving forward with a speed vf D 17:2 ft=s.
Let r D 4:25 in: be the radius of the ball, and let kG D 2:6 in: be its radius of
gyration.

Problem 8.13 Determine the work done by friction on the ball from the initial
time until the time that the ball starts rolling without slip.

Problem 8.14 Knowing that the coefficient of kinetic friction between the
lane and the ball is k D 0:1, determine the length Lf over which the friction
force acts in order to slow down the ball from v0 to vf . Does Lf also represent
the distance traveled by the center of the ball? Explain.

Solution to 8.13

Given the FBD shown and that the ball does not move in the vertical direction, F is the
only force doing work on the ball. Letting be the position at which the ball first makes
contact with the lane and be the position at which the ball starts rolling without slip,
and letting U1-2 be the work of friction, we have

U1-2 D T2 T1 ; (1)

where
T1 D 12 mv12 C 12 IG !12 and T2 D 21 mv22 C 12 IG !22 ; (2)
wre the kinetic energies of the ball at and , respectively.
Observe that we have
2
m D W =g; IG D .W =g/kG ; v1 D v0 ; !1 D !0 ; v2 D vf ; and !2 D vf =r: (3)

Substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1), after simplifying we have
W h 2 2 i
U1-2 D v k r 2 v02 vf2 C kG
2 2
!0 ; (4)
2gr 2 f G
which can be evaluated to obtain
U1-2 D 47:8 ftlb;

where we have used the following numerical data: W D 14 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , r D 4:25 in: D 0:3542 ft,
vf D 17:2 ft=s, kG D 2:6 in: D 0:2167 ft, v0 D 17:0 mph D 24:93 ft=s, and !0 D 10 rad=s.

August 10, 2009


1078 Solutions Manual

Solution to 8.14

Letting be the position at which the ball first makes contact with the lane and be
the position at which the ball starts rolling without slip, and letting U1-2 be the work of
friction, we have
U1-2 D T2 T1 ; (5)
where
T1 D 12 mv12 C 12 IG !12 and T2 D 21 mv22 C 12 IG !22 ; (6)
wre the kinetic energies of the ball at and , respectively.
Observe that we have
2
m D W =g; IG D .W =g/kG ; v1 D v0 ; !1 D !0 ; v2 D vf ; and !2 D vf =r: (7)

Substituting Eqs. (6) and (7) into Eq. (5), after simplifying we have
W h 2 2 i
U1-2 D v k r 2 v02 vf2 C kG
2 2
!0 ; (8)
2gr 2 f G
Now, referring to the FBD on the right, observing that F D k N because the ball is slipping, summing
forces in the vertical direction, and observing that the ball does not move in the vertical direction, we must
have
F D k mg D k W: (9)
Since F is constant, U1-2 D Lf F , where U1-2 is that given in Eq. (8). Hence,

1  2 2
r 2 .v02 vf2 C kG
2 2

Lf D U1-2 =F D v k !0 /; (10)
2k gr f G
2

which can be evaluated to obtain


Lf D 34:1 ft;

where we have used the following numerical data: k D 0:1, W D 14 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , r D 4:25 in: D
0:3542 ft, vf D 17:2 ft=s, kG D 2:6 in: D 0:2167 ft, v0 D 17:0 mph D 24:93 ft=s, and !0 D 10 rad=s.
In general, the distance Lf is not the distance traveled by the center of ball. This is because the center of
wheel goes from a speed of v0 to the speed vf whereas the point of contact between the wheel and the ground
must slow down from a speed of v0 C !0 r to 0. Hence, depending on the initial conditions, the distance over
which the friction force acts during slip may not be the same as that traveled by the center of the ball.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1079

Problem 8.15

A bowling ball is thrown onto a lane with a forward velocity v0 and no angular
velocity (!0 D 0). Because of friction between the lane and the ball, after a
short time, the ball starts rolling without slip and moving forward with speed
vf . Let LG be the distance traveled by the center of the ball while slowing
down from v0 to vf . In addition, let Lf be the length over which the friction
force had to act in order to slow down the ball from v0 to vf . State which
of the following relations is true and why: (a) LG < Lf ; (b) LG D Lf ; (c)
LG > Lf .

Solution
Answer The problem solution is (c) LG > Lf .

Explanation Begin with observing that the point of application of the friction force is not an individual
point but it changes with time. With this in mind, we can think of the point of application of the friction force
as a point whose initial speed is v0 and its final speed if zero, where this value of final speed is achieved when
the ball starts rolling without slip. In the same amount of time that the point of application of the friction
force goes from v0 to zero, the center of the ball goes from v0 to some value vf 0. This indicates that the
magnitude of the acceleration of the point of application of the friction force is larger than that of the center
of the wheel. In turn, recalling that the points in question have the same initial speed, this indicates that the
center of wheel travels farther than the point of application of the friction force.

August 10, 2009


1080 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.16

A conveyor is moving cans at a constant speed v0 when, to proceed to the next


step in packaging, the cans are transferred onto a stationary surface at A. The
cans each have mass m, width w, and height h. Assuming that there is friction
between each can and the stationary surface, under what conditions would we
be able to compute the stopping distance of the cans, using the work-energy
principle for a particle?

Solution
A rigid body motion problem can be reduced to the solution of a particle problem if the rigid body is a
translation. Therefore, as long as the cans do not tip once they slide over the fixed surface to the left of the
conveyor, then we would be able to compute the slipping distance using only a particle model.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1081

Problem 8.17

One of the basement doors is left open in the vertical position when it is given a nudge and allowed to
freely fall to the closed position. Given that the door has mass m and that it is modeled as a uniform thin
plate of width w and length d , determine its angular velocity when it reaches the closed position. Hint:
Treat the problem as symmetric with respect to a plane of motion in which the acceleration due to gravity
is g cos  rather than g.

Solution
In the FBD shown, the direction perpendicular to the plane of
motion is parallel to the axis of rotation of the door. Following
the given hint, we see that the door is subject only to a component
of the force of gravity. The forces Rx and Ry are the (fixed) pin
reaction forces and do not work. Hence, letting be the position
at which the door is released and be the position at which the
door first achieves its closed position, we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where
T1 D 0; V1 D 21 wmg cos ; T2 D 12 IO !d2 2 ; V2 D 0; (2)
and where !d is the angular speed of the door and IO is the mass
moment of inertia of the door computed relative to the axis of
rotation and is given by
 w 2
2
IO D 1
12 mw Cm D 13 mw 2 : (3)
2
Notice that, given the geometry of the door, we have
l
cos  D p (4)
h2 C l 2
Substituting Eqs. (2)(4) into Eq. (1) and solving for !d , we have
s
3gl
!d 2 D p : (5)
w h2 C l 2
Given our choice of component system, then the angular velocity of the door at is
s
3gl O
!E d 2 D p k;
w h2 C l 2
where kO is parallel to the rotation axis of the door and pointing toward the ground.

August 10, 2009


1082 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.18

The disk D, which has mass m, center of mass G, and radius of gyration kG , is
at rest on a flat horizontal surface when the constant moment M is applied to it.
The disk is attached at its center to a vertical wall by a linear elastic spring of
constant k. The spring is unstretched when the system is at rest. Assuming that
the disk rolls without slipping and that it has not yet come to a stop, determine
the angular velocity of the disk after its center G has moved a distance d . After
doing so, determine the distance ds that the disk moves before it comes to a
stop.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown and recalling that the disk rolls without slip, work is done
only by the spring force and by the applied moment. Letting position 1 be the position
of the disk at release and letting any generic position following the position of release
be position 2, we have
T1 C V1 C U1-2 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, recalling that M is constant,

T1 D 0; V1 D 0; U1-2 D M.d=R/; T2 D 21 IO !d2 2 ; V2 D 12 kd 2 ; (2)

and where !d is the angular speed of the disk, IO is the mass moment of inertia of
the disk relative to point O which is in contact with the ground, and d=R measures
the angular displacement of the disk corresponding to an horizontal displacement of
the center of the disk of an amount d .
Using the parallel axis theorem, the quantity IO is given by
2
IO D mkG C mR2 D m.kG
2
C R2 /: (3)

Substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1), and solving for !2 , we have

s
.2M d=R/ kd 2
!2 D 2
: (4)
m.kG C R2 /

Setting !d 2 D 0 in Eq. (4) and we obtain the value of ds , which is

2M
ds D : (5)
kR

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1083

Problem 8.19

The uniform rectangular plate of length `, height h, and mass m lies in the vertical plane and is pinned at
one corner. If the plate is released from rest in the position shown, determine its angular velocity when the
center of mass G is directly below the pivot O. Neglect any friction at the pin at O.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Hence, letting
position 1 be the position of the plate at release and letting position 2 be
when point G is immediately below O, we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where
p
2
T1 D 0; V1 D 0; T2 D 21 IO !p2 ; V2 D 1
2 mg `2 C h2 ; (2)

and where !p is the angular speed of the plate, and where IO , which is
the mass moment of inertia of the plate about point O, is given by

2
IO D 1
12 m.` C h2 / C 41 m.`2 C h2 / D 13 m.`2 C h2 /: (3)
Substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and solving for !p2 we have that the plate rotates clockwise
with the following angular speed
s
3g
!p2 D p :
` C h2
2

August 10, 2009


1084 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.20

A turbine rotor with weight W D 3000 lb, center of mass at the fixed point G,
and radius of gyration kG D 15 ft is brought from rest to an angular velocity
! D 1500 rpm in 20 revolutions by applying a constant torque M . Neglecting
friction, determine the value of M needed to spin up the rotor as described.

Solution
Observe that work is done only by the applied moment M . Letting be the initial position and be the
position of the rotor after 20 revolutions, we have

T1 C U1-2 D T2 ; (1)

where
T1 D 0; T2 D 12 IG ! 2 ; U1-2 D M; (2)
where ! is the angular speed of the rotor at ,  is the angular displacement of the rotor between positions
2
and , and IG D .W =g/kG is the rotors mass moment of inertia.
Substituting the expressions in Eq. (2) and the expression for IG into Eq. (1), and solving for M , we
obtain
k2 W !2
M D G ; (3)
2g
which can be evaluated to obtain
M D 2:06106 ftlb;

where we have used the following numerical data: kG D 15 ft, W D 3000 lb, ! D 1500 rpm D 157:1 rad=s,
g D 32:2 ft=s2 , and  D 20 rev D 125:7 rad.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1085

Problem 8.21

A turbine rotor with weight W D 3000 lb, center of mass at the fixed point
G, and radius of gyration kG D 15 ft is spinning with an angular speed ! D
1200 rpm when a braking system is engaged that applies a constant torque
M D 3000 ftlb. Determine the number of revolutions needed to bring the rotor
to a stop.

Solution
Observe that work is done only by the applied moment M . Letting be the position at which the brakes are
first applied and be the position of the rotor when it first comes to a stop, we have

T1 C U1-2 D T2 ; (1)

where
T1 D 12 IG ! 2 ; T2 D 0; U1-2 D M; (2)
where ! is the angular speed of the rotor at ,  is the angular displacement of the rotor between positions
2
and , and IG D .W =g/kG is the rotors mass moment of inertia.
Substituting the expressions in Eq. (2) and the expression for IG into Eq. (1), and solving for , we
obtain
k2 W !2
 D G ; (3)
2gM
which can be evaluated to obtain
 D 8790 rev;

where we have used the following numerical data: kG D 15 ft, W D 3000 lb, ! D 1200 rpm D 125:7 rad=s,
g D 32:2 ft=s2 , and M D 3000 ftlb.

August 10, 2009


1086 Solutions Manual

Problems 8.22 and 8.23

In a contraption built by a fraternity, a person sits at the center of a swinging


platform with mass m D 400 kg and length L D 4 m suspended via two
identical arms of length H D 3 m.

Problem 8.22 Neglecting the mass of the arms and of the person, neglecting
friction, and assuming that the platform is released from rest when  D 180 ,
compute the speed of the person as a function  for 0    180 . In addition,
find the speed of the person for  D 0 .

Problem 8.23 Neglecting the mass of the person, neglecting friction, letting
the mass of each arm be mA D 150 kg, and assuming that the platform is
released from rest when  D 180 , compute the speed of the person as a
function  for 0    180 . In addition, find the speed of the person for
 D 0 .

Solution to 8.22

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. We


define as the position of the system at release. We define as the
position of the system for a generic value of . Hence, we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, since the system is released from rest and due to our choice
of datum, we have

2 2
T1 D 0; V1 D 2mgH; T2 D 21 mvG C 12 IG !p2 ; V2 D mgH.1 cos  /; (2)
where vG is the speed of the mass center of the platform, !p is the angular speed of the platform, and where
IG , which is the mass moment of inertia of the platform about its own mass center.
Since the platform can only translate, we have that !p2 D 0 and the speed of the person moving along
with the platform is equal t that of point G. Therefore, substituting Eq. (2) into Eq. (1) and solving for vG ,
we have
p
vperson D vG D 2gH.1 C cos  /: (3)

Evaluating Eq. (3) for  D 0 , we have



vperson D0 D 10:8 m=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 9:81 m=s2 and H D 3 m.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1087

Solution to 8.23

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. We


define as the position of the system at release. We define as the
position of the system for a generic value of . Hence, we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (4)

where, since the system is released from rest, due to our choice of
datum, and given that the arms are identical and must always move
parallel to one another, we have

T1 D 0; V1 D 2mgH C 3mA gH; (5)


1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
T2 D 2 mvG C 2 IG !p2 C 2 IA !AB C 2 ID !CD V2 D mgH.1 cos  / C 2mA gH 1 2 cos  ; (6)

where vG is the speed of the mass center of the platform, !p is the angular speed of the platform, IG is the
mass moment of inertia of the platform about its own mass center, IA is the mass moment of inertia of bar
AB about A, ID is the mass moment of inertia of bar CD about D, !AB is the angular speed of bar AB, and
!CD is the angular speed of bar CD.
The mass moments of inertia IA and ID are given by
2
IA D ID D 1
12 mA H C mA .H=2/2 D 13 mA H 2 : (7)

We observe that the platform can only translate and that therefore the speed of the person is the same as
that of point G. Also, notice that the arms must always remain parallel to one another and that points B and
C must have the same speed as point G. Therefore, we have

!p2 D 0; !AB2 D !CD2 D vG2 =H: (8)

Substituting Eqs. (2)(8) into Eq. (4) and solving for vG , we have

s
.m C mA /.1 C cos  /
vperson D vG D 6gH : (9)
3m C 2mA

Evaluating Eq. (9) for  D 0 , we have



vperson D0 D 11:4 m=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 9:81 m=s2 and H D 3 m, m D 400 kg, and
mA D 150 kg.

August 10, 2009


1088 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.24

An eccentric wheel with weight W D 250 lb, mass center G, and radius
of gyration kG D 1:32 ft is initially at rest in the position shown. Letting
R D 1:75 ft and h D 0:8 ft, and assuming that the wheel is gently nudged to
the right and rolls without slip, determine the speed of O when G is closest to
the ground.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, since the wheel rolls without slip, work is done
only by gravity. We define as the position of the system at release. We define
as the position of the system when G is closest to the ground. Hence, we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, since the system is released from rest and due to our choice of datum, we
have
2 2
T1 D 0; V1 D W h; T2 D 12 mvG C 21 IG !w2 ; V2 D W h; (2)

where vG is the speed of the mass center of the wheel, !w is the angular speed
of the wheel, and where IG , which is the mass moment of inertia of the wheel
about its own mass center. The mass moment of inertia IG is given by

2
IG D .W =g/kG : (3)
Since the wheel rolls without slip, we have
vO vO
!w2 D and vG2 D .R h/: (4)
R R
Substituting Eqs. (2)(4) into Eq. (1) and solving for vO , we have
s
gh
vO D 2R 2
: (5)
.R h/2 C kG

Evaluating Eq. (5), we have


vO D 10:9 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: R D 1:75 ft, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , h D 0:8 ft, kG D 1:32 ft.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1089

Problem 8.25

An eccentric wheel with mass m D 150 kg, mass center G, and radius of
gyration kG D 0:4 m is placed on the incline shown such that the wheels
center of mass G is vertically aligned with P , which is the point of contact
with the incline. If the wheel rolls without slip once it is gently nudged away
from its initial placement, letting R D 0:55 m, h D 0:25 m,  D 25 , and
d D 0:5 m, determine whether the wheel arrives at B and, if yes, determine the
corresponding speed of the center O. Note that the angle POG is not equal to
90 at release.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown to the right, since the wheel rolls without slip,
work is done only by gravity. Referring to the figure below, we define
as the position of the system at release; and we define as the position of
the system when the point of contact between the wheel and the incline is
at B (see figure below).

Hence, we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, since the system is released from rest and due to our choice of datum, we have

T1 D 0; V1 D mg.R cos  C h sin 1 /; (2)


2 2
T2 D 12 mvG2 C 12 IG !w2 ; V2 D mg.R cos  C h sin 2 C d sin  /; (3)

where vG is the speed of the mass center of the wheel, !w is the angular speed of the wheel, and where IG ,
which is the mass moment of inertia of the wheel about its own mass center. The mass moment of inertia IG
is given by
2
IG D mkG : (4)
To evaluate V1 and V2 we need 1 and 2 . At G is directly above P so that
1
h cos 1 D R sin  ) 1 D cos .R= h/ sin  D 0:3770 rad: (5)

In going from to , the center of the wheel displaces a distance d up the incline while the wheel rolls
without slip. Hence, we must have

2 D 1 d=R D 0:5321 rad: (6)

August 10, 2009


1090 Solutions Manual

Again, due to rolling without slip we have

!w2 D vO2 =R and vG2 D .vO2 =R/dBG2 ; (7)

where dBG2 is the distance between B and G at , which, using the law of cosines, is given by
q
dBG2 D R2 C h2 2Rh cos.90  C 2 /: (8)

Using Eqs. (7) and (8) into the expression for the kinetic energy, then we have
2
vO2
T1 D 0 and T2 D 21 m k 2 C R2 C h2 2Rh cos.90  C 2 /: (9)
R2 G
Substituting the expressions for the kinetic and potential energies into the work-energy principle and then
solving for v0 , we obtain
s
2g.sin 1 sin 2 / d sin 
vO2 D R 2
; (10)
kG C R2 C h2 C 2Rh sin.2  C 2 /

which can be evaluated to obtain


vO2 D 0:388 m=s;

where we have used the values of 1 and 2 given in Eqs. (5) and (6), respectively, and where we have
used the following numerical data: R D 0:55 m, g D 9:81 ft=s2 , d D 0:5 m,  D 25 , kG D 0:4 m, and
h D 0:25 m. Since we have obtained an acceptable solution, we can conclude that the wheel does arrive at B
if nudged away from equilibrium.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1091

Problems 8.26 and 8.27

In a contraption built by a fraternity, a person sits at the center of a swinging


platform with weight Wp D 800 lb and length L D 12 ft suspended via two
identical arms each of length H D 10 ft and weight Wa D 200 lb. The platform,
which is at rest when  D 0, is put in motion by a motor that pumps the ride by
exerting a constant moment M in the direction shown whenever 0    p
while exerting zero moment for any other value of .

Problem 8.26 Neglecting the mass of the person, neglecting friction, letting
M D 900 ftlb, and letting p D 25 , find the minimum number of swings
necessary to achieve  > 90 and the ensuing speed achieved by the person
at the lowest point in the swing. Model the arms AB and CD as uniform thin
bars.

Problem 8.27 Neglecting the mass of the person, neglecting friction, and
letting p D 20 , determine the value of M required to achieve a maximum
value of  equal to 90 in 6 full swings. Model the arms AB and CD as uniform
thin bars.

Solution to 8.26

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity and the
moment due to the motor. Let be the initial position of the system.
To determine the minimum number of pumping cycles to achieve
 D 90 , we first compute the amount of energy needed for the
system to barely achieve the position with  D 90 , which we
choose as . Applying the work-energy principle, we have

T1 C V1 C .U1-2 /nc D T2 C V2 ; (1)

Due to our definitions of and , and due to our choice of datum,


we have

H
T1 D 0; V1 D 2Wa ; T2 D 0 V2 D 2Wa H C Wp H: (2)
2
Since the moment provided by the motor is constant, the work done by the motor over a single pumping cycle
is M p . The amount of work needed to go from to can be expressed as

.U1-2 /nc D .M p /f; (3)

where f is a real valued factor measuring how much the unit amount of work M p must be repeated to get
the system to achieve . Substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and solving for f , we obtain
H.Wa C Wp /
f D D 25:46; (4)
M p
where we have used the following numerical data: H D 10 ft, Wa D 200 lb, Wp D 800 lb, M D 900 ftlb,
and p D 25 . Hence, the minimum number of pumping cycles needed to achieve  > 90 is the smallest
integer that is larger then f , i.e.,
nmin D 26: (5)

August 10, 2009


1092 Solutions Manual

Speed of the person at  D 0 after 26 pumping cycles. Let be the position with  D 0 that is reached
after 26 pumping cycles. Since the platform can only translate, and the arms AB and CD are in fixed axis
rotations about A and D, respectively, we have
2 2 2
T3 D 12 mp vp3 C 21 IA !AB3 C 12 ID !CD3 ; (6)

where
IA D ID D 13 ma H 2 : (7)
Then, applying the work-energy principle between and and observing that V1 D V3 since 1 D 3 , we
have  v 2
2 p3
M p nmin D 21 mp vp3 C 13 ma H 2 ; (8)
H
where we have used the fact that !AB3 D !CD3 D vp3 =H . Solving for vp3 we obtain
s s
6M p nmin 6gM p nmin
vp3 D D ; (9)
3mp C 2ma 3Wp C 2Wa

where g is the acceleration due to gravity. The above expression is also the speed person at since the
person translates with the platform. Hence, evaluating the above expression, we have,

vperson D 26:5 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , H D 10 ft, Wa D 200 lb, Wp D 800 lb,
M D 900 ftlb, and p D 25 .

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1093

Solution to 8.27

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity and the
moment due to the motor. Let be the initial position of the system
and be the position with  D max D 90 that is achieved after 6
pumping cycles. Applying the work-energy principle, we have

T1 C V1 C .U1-2 /nc D T2 C V2 ; (10)

Recalling that the system starts from rest and that the system is again
at rest in because  D max , we have

H
T1 D 0; V1 D 2Wa ; T2 D 0 V2 D 2Wa H C Wp H; .U1-2 /nc D 6M p : (11)
2
Substituting Eqs. (11) into Eq. (10) and solving for M , we obtain

Wp C Wa
M DH D 4770 ftlb; (12)
6p

where we have used the following numerical data: H D 10 ft, Wa D 200 lb, Wp D 800 lb, and p D 20 .

August 10, 2009


1094 Solutions Manual

Problems 8.28 and 8.29

The Charpy impact test is one test that measures the resistance of a material to
fracture. In this test, the fracture toughness is assessed by measuring the energy
required to break a specimen of a given geometry. This is done by releasing
a heavy pendulum from rest at an angle i and then measuring the maximum
swing angle f reached by the pendulum after the specimen is broken.

Problem 8.28 Consider a test rig in which the striker S (the pendulums
bob) can be modeled as a uniform disk of mass mS D 19:5 kg and radius
rS D 150 mm, and the arm can be modeled as a thin rod of mass mA D 2:5 kg
and length LA D 0:8 m. Neglecting friction and noting that the striker and
the arm are rigidly connected, determine the fracture energy (i.e., the kinetic
energy lost in breaking the specimen) in an experiment where i D 158 and
f D 43 .

Problem 8.29 Consider a test rig in which the striker S (the pendulums bob)
can be modeled as a uniform disk of weight WS D 40 lb and radius rS D 6 in:,
and the arm can be modeled as a thin rod of weight WA D 5:5 lb and length
LA D 2:75 ft. If the release angle of the striker is i D 158 and if the striker
impacts the specimen when the pendulums arm is vertical, determine the speed
of the point Q on the striker immediately before the striker impacts with the
specimen. Neglect friction and observe that the striker and the arm are rigidly
connected.

Solution to 8.28

When not in contact with the fracture specimen, the pendulum is acted upon by
the forces in the FBD shown. Let be when  D 1 D i ; and be when
 D 2 D f . In going from to the system is acted upon by gravity and
by the contact forces between it and the specimen. Applying the work-energy
principle, we have
T1 C V1 C .U1-2 /nc D T2 C V2 ; (1)
Due to our definitions of and , and due to our choice of datum, we have

LA
T1 D 0; V1 D mA g cos 1 mS g.LA C rS / cos 1 ; (2)
2
LA
T2 D 0 V2 D mA g cos 2 mS g.LA C rS / cos 2 : (3)
2
The work due to the nonconservative forces is all due to fracture, i.e.,
.U1-2 /nc D Ufracture : (4)
Substituting Eqs. (2)(4) into Eq. (1) and solving for Ufracture , we obtain

1
Ufracture D 2 gLA .mA C 2mS / C 2mS rS .cos f cos i / D 318 J; (5)

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 9:81 m=s2 , LA D 0:8 m, mA D 2:5 kg, mS D 19:5 kg,
rS D 150 mm D 15010 3 m, f D 43 , and i D 158 .
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1095

Solution to 8.29

Let be when  D 1 D i ; and be when  D 2 D 0 . In going from


to the system is subject only to gravity. Applying conservation of eenergy, we
have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (6)
Observe that the system is in a fixed axis rotation about O. Hence, due to our
definitions of and , and due to our choice of datum, we have

LA
T1 D 0; V1 D mA g cos 1 mS g.LA C rS / cos 1 ; (7)
2
LA
T2 D 12 IO !p2 V2 D mA g cos 2 mS g.LA C rS / cos 2 ; (8)
2
where !p is the angular speed of the system and where
2
IO D 13 .WA =g/LA C 12 .WS =g/.rS2 C .WS =g/.LA C rS /2 D 13:71 slugft2 ; (9)

where we have used the following data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , WA D 5:5 lb, WS D 40 lb, LA D 2:75 ft, and
rS D 6 in: D 0:5000 ft.
Substituting Eqs. (7) and (8) into Eq. (1) and solving for !p2 , we obtain

1 p
!p2 D p LA WA C 2.LA C rS /WS .1 cos i / (10)
IO

Since the system is in a fixed axis rotation about O, the speed of Q in will simply be given by dOQ !p2 ,
where q
dOQ D .LA C rS /2 C rS2 (11)
Hence, the solution of the problem is

q
.LA C rS /2 C rS2 p
vQ D p LA WA C 2.LA C rS /WS .1 cos i / D 20:4 ft=s;
IO

where we have used the following numerical data: LA D 2:75 ft, rS D 6 in: D 0:5000 ft, IO D 13:71 slugft2
(see Eq. (9)), WA D 5:5 lb, WS D 40 lb, and i D 158 .

August 10, 2009


1096 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.30

A crate, with weight W D 155 lb and mass center G, is placed on a slide and
released from rest as shown. The lower part of the slide is circular with radius
R D 6 ft. Model the crate as a uniform body with b D 3:6 ft and h D 2 ft, take
into account the gap between the crate and the slide when the crate is in its
lowest position, and assume that when the crate is in its lowest position on the
slide, the crates center of mass is moving to the left with a speed vG D 12 ft=s.
Determine the work done by friction on the crate as the crate moves from the
release point to the lowest point on the slide.

Solution

The crate is acted upon by the forces in the FBD shown to the right. Only gravity and
friction do work since the point of application of the normal force does not move in
the direction of that force. Referring to the figure given below, let be the position
at release and be the lowest position achieved by the crate.

Applying the work-energy principle, we have

T1 C V1 C .U1-2 /nc D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, due to our choice of datum and the definition of and , we have
1
T1 D 0; V1 D W .R ` 2 h/; (2)
2 2
T2 D 12 .W =g/vG2 C 12 IG !c2 ; V2 D 0: (3)

where the mass moment of inertia about G is given by


2
IG D 1
12 .W =g/.h C b 2 / D 6:803 slugft2 ; (4)

where we have used the following numerical data: W D 155 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , h D 2 ft, and b D 3:6 ft.
Next, using trigonometry, we have
q
`DR R2 .b=2/2 D 0:2764 ft; (5)

where we have used the following numerical data: R D 6 ft and b D 3:6 ft. Finally, notice that at the crate
is in a fixed axis rotation about O. Hence, we have
vG2
!c2 D D 2:540 rad=s; (6)
R ` h=2
where we have used the following numerical data: R D 6 ft, ` D 0:2764 ft (see Eq. (5)), and vG2 D vG D
12 ft=s.
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1097

Observing that the work of friction coincides with the term .U1-2 /nc , substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) in
Eq. (1), and solving for .U1-2 /nc , we have
2 2
Ufriction D .U1-2 /nc D 12 .W =g/vG2 C 12 IG !c2 W .R ` 1
2 h/; (7)

which can be evaluated to obtain


Ufriction D 364 ftlb;

where we have used the following numerical data: W D 155 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , vG2 D vG D 12 ft=s,
!c2 D 2:540 rad=s (see Eq. (6)), R D 6 ft, ` D 0:2764 ft (see Eq. (5)), and h D 2 ft.

August 10, 2009


1098 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.31

The disk D, which has weight W , mass center G coinciding with the disks
geometric center, and radius of gyration kG , is at rest on an incline when the
constant moment M is applied to it. The disk is attached at its center to a wall
by a linear elastic spring of constant k. The spring is unstretched when the
system is at rest. Assuming that the disk rolls without slipping and that it has
not yet come to a stop, determine the angular velocity of the disk after its center
G has moved a distance d down the incline. After doing so, using k D 5 lb=ft,
R D 1:5 ft, W D 10 lb, and  D 30 , determine the value of the moment M
for the disk to stop after rolling ds D 5 ft down the incline.

Solution

Given the FBD shown and recalling that the disk rolls without slip, work is done only
by gravity, the spring force, and the moment M . Let be the position at release
and be the position achieved by the disk after having rolled a distance d down the
incline. Applying the work-energy principle between and , we have

T1 C V1 C .U1-2 /nc D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, choosing the datum line to go through the mass center of the disk in , we
have
2
T1 D 0; V1 D 0; T2 D 12 mvG C 21 IG !d2 ; V2 D W d sin  C 12 kd 2 ; .U1-2 /nc D M D ; (2)

where vG is the speed of G at , !d is the angular speed of the disk at , and D is the angular displacement
of the disk in the direction of M due to the rolling motion. Because of rolling without slip, we must have

vG D R!d and D D d=R: (3)

Substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and solving for !d , we obtain

s
g p
!d D 2
d .2M=R/ C 2W sin  d k (4)
W .R2 C kG /

To determine the desired value of the moment M , we substitute ds in place of d in Eq. (4), then we set !s
equal to zero, and solve for M to obtain

M D 12 R.ds k 2W sin  / D 11:2 ftlb;

where we have used the following numerical data: R D 1:5 ft, ds D 5 ft, k D 5 lb=ft, W D 10 lb, and
 D 30 .

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1099

Problem 8.32

The figure shows the cross section of a garage door with length L D 9 ft and
weight W D 175 lb. At A and B there are rollers of negligible mass constrained
to move in the guide whose horizontal portion is at a distance H D 11 ft from
the floor. The doors motion is assisted by two springs, each with constant k
(only one spring is shown). The door is released from rest when d D 26 in: and
the spring is stretched 4 in: Neglecting friction, knowing that, when A touches
the floor, B is in the vertical portion of the guide, and modeling the door as a
uniform thin plate, determine the minimum value of k so that A will strike the
ground with a speed no greater than 1 ft=s.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity and the spring
force. Let be the position at release and be the position achieved by
the door when A strikes the floor. Since energy is conserved in going from
to , we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, recalling that the door is released from rest, given the choice of
datum, and recalling that there are two springs, we have

T1 D 0; V1 D 2 21 k02 C W .H 1
2 d /; (2)
1 2 1 2 2
T2 D 2 mvG2 C 2 IG !d 2 ; V2 D 2 12 k.0 CH d / C 21 LW: (3)

In the door is undergoing a translation. Hence, we must have

vG2 D vA2 D vmax and !d 2 D 0; (4)


where vmax is the maximum speed with which A strikes the floor.
Substituting Eqs. (2)(4) into Eq. (1), recalling that m D W =g, and solving for k, we have

2 C g.L C d
W vmax 2H /
kD D 11:3 lb=ft;
2g .H d /.H C 20 d /

where we have used the following numerical data: W D 175 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , vmax D 1 ft=s, L D 9 ft,
d D 26 in: D 2:167 ft, H D 11 ft, and 0 D 4 in: D 0:3333 ft.

August 10, 2009


1100 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.33

In Example 8.2 on p. 602 we ignored the rotational inertia of the counterweight. Lets revisit that example
and remove that simplifying assumption. Assume that the arm AD is still a uniform thin bar of length
L D 15:7 ft and weight 45 lb. The hinge O is still d D 2:58 ft from the right end of arm, and the 160 lb
counterweight C is still D 1:4 ft from the hinge. Now model the counterweight as a uniform block of
height h D 14 in: and width w D 9 in: With this new assumption, solve for the angular velocity of the arm
as it reaches the horizontal position after being nudged from the vertical position. Determine the percent
change in angular velocity compared with that found in Example 8.2.

Solution

Given the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Let be the
position at release when the gate is vertical, and be when the gate
is horizontal. Energy is conserved between and , so that we
have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, given our choice of datum line and given that the system is
in a fixed axis rotation about O, we have
T1 D 0; V1 D Wa . 12 L d/ Wc ; (2)
1 2
T2 D 2 IO !a2 V2 D 0; (3)
where !a is the angular speed of the arm and IO is the mass moment
of inertia of the entire system about O and is therefore given by

2
IO D 1
12 .Wa =g/L C .Wa =g/. 12 L d /2 C 1
12 .Wc =g/.w
2
C h2 / C .Wc =g/ 2 D 78:05 slugft2 ; (4)
where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , Wa D 45 lb, L D 15:7 ft, d D 2:58 ft,
Wc D 160 lb, w D 9 in: D 0:7500 ft, h D 14 in: D 1:167 ft, and D 1:4 ft.
Substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and solving for !a2 we have

1 p
!a2 D p LWa 2d Wa 2Wc D 0:580 rad=s;
IO

where we have used the result in Eq. (4) along with the following numerical data: L D 15:7 ft, Wa D 45 lb,
d D 2:58 ft, Wc D 160 lb, and D 1:4 ft. Hence, the percentage difference in angular speed relative to the
result obtained in Example 8.2 is

0:580 0:583
Percentage difference D 100% D 0:515%:
0:583

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1101

Problem 8.34

For the barrier gate shown, assume that the arm consists of a section of aluminum tubing from A to B of
length l D 11:6 ft and weight 20 lb and a steel support section from B to D of weight 40 lb. The overall
length of the arm is L D 15:7 ft. In addition, the 120 lb counterweight C is placed a distance from the
hinge at O; and the hinge is d D 2:58 ft from the right end of section BD. Model the two sections AB and
BD as uniform thin bars, and model the counterweight as a uniform block of height h D 14 in: and width
w D 9 in: Using these new assumptions, determine the distance so that the angular velocity of the arm is
0:25 rad=s as it reaches the horizontal position after being nudged from the vertical position.

Solution
Given the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Let be
when the gate is vertical, and be when the gate is horizontal.
Energy is conserved between and , so that we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 (1)
Since the system is in a fixed axis rotation about O, we have
2
T1 D 0 and T2 D 12 IO !a2 (2)
where !a is the angular speed of the arm and IO is the mass
moment of inertia of the entire system about O and is given by

WAB 2 WAB 1 1 WBD


IO D 1
12 l C . 2 l C L l d /2 C 12 .L l/2
g g g
WBD 1 Wc Wc 2
C d 12 .L l/2 C 12 .w 2 C h2 / C D 42:93 slugft2 .3:727 slug/ 2 ; (3)
g g g
where we have used the following numerical data: WAB D 20 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , l D 11:6 ft, L D 15=7 ft,
d D 2:58 ft, WBD D 40 lb, Wc D 120 lb, w D 9 in: D 0:7500 ft, and h D 14 in: D 1:167 ft. Given the
choice of datum, the potential energies V1 and V2 are given by
V1 D WAB . 12 l C L l d/ WBD d .L l/=2 Wc D 125:2 ftlb .120:0 lb/; (4)
V2 D 0; (5)
where we have used the following numerical data: WAB D 20 lb, l D 11:6 ft, L D 15=7 ft, d D 2:58 ft,
WBD D 40 lb, and Wc D 120 lb. Recalling that !a2 D 0:25 rad=s, substituting Eqs. (2)(5) into Eq. (1)
yields:
125:2 ftlb .120:0 lb/ D 1:342 ftlb C .0:1165 lb=ft/ 2 : (6)
Equation (6) is a second order algebraic equation for with the two roots D 1031 ft and D 1:031 ft.
Since admissible values of must be positive, the solution to the problem is therefore

D 1:03 ft:

August 10, 2009


1102 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.35

The figure shows the cross section of a garage door with length L D 2:5 m
and mass m D 90 kg. At the ends A and B there are rollers of negligible
mass constrained to move in the guide whose horizontal portion is at a distance
H D 3 m from the floor. The doors motion is assisted by two counterweights
C , each of mass mC (only one counterweight is shown). If the door is released
from rest when d D 53 cm, neglecting friction and modeling the door as a
uniform thin plate, determine the minimum value of mC so that A will strike
the ground with a speed no greater than 0:25 m=s.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Let be the
position at release and be the position achieved by the door when A
strikes the floor. Since energy is conserved in going from to , we
have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, given the choice of datum, modeling the door as a rigid body and
the counterweights as particles, and recalling that the door is released
from rest, we have

T1 D 0; (2)
1
V1 D 2mC gyC1 C mAB g.H 2 d /; (3)
2
T2 D 21 mAB vG2 C 21 IG !d2 2 C 2
2 12 mC vC

2 ; (4)
1
V2 D 2mC gyC 2 C 2 LmAB g; (5)

where mAB is the mass of the door, yC1 and yC 2 are the vertical coor-
dinates of the counterweights at and , respectively, IG is the mass moment of inertia of the door with
respect to the doors center of mass G, vG is the speed of G, and !d is the angular speed of the door.
Now observe that in the door is sliding within the vertical portion of the guide. This implies that at
the door is translating so that the doors angular speed must be equal to zero. For the same reason, the
speed of A must be equal to the speed of the center of mass G. In addition, notice that, in going from
to , the counterweights C are lifted by the same amount that point A descends. Hence, recalling that the
counterweights C must move with the same speed as A, we have

vG2 D vA2 D vmax ; vC 2 D vA2 D vmax ; !d 2 D 0; and yC 2 D yC1 C .H d /; (6)


where vmax is the maximum speed with which A strikes the floor.
Substituting Eqs. (2)(6) into Eq. (1), and solving for mC , we have

 2 
mAB vmax C g.L C d 2H /
mC D 2
D 27:0 kg;
2 2dg 2Hg vmax

where we have used the following numerical data: mAB D 90 kg, g D 9:81 m=s2 , vmax D 0:25 m=s,
L D 2:5 m, d D 53 cm D 0:5300 m, and H D 3 m.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1103

Problem 8.36

Revisit Example 8.5 on p. 608 and replace the two springs with a system of
two counterweights P (only one counterweight is shown) each of weight WP .
Recalling that the doors weight is W D 800 lb and that the total height of the
door is H D 30 ft, if the door is released from rest in the fully open position
and friction is negligible, determine the minimum value of WP so that A will
strike the left end of the horizontal guide with a speed no greater than 0:5 ft=s.

Solution

The FBD on the system is shown on the right. Point A can only move
horizontally. Points B and D can only move vertically. Hence, the only
forces that can do work are the weights of the systems components. As
shown in the lower figure, let denote the position of the door when
fully open, and the position of the door when fully closed. We then
write the work-energy principle as follows:

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, T1 and T2 are the kinetic energies of the system at and ,


respectively, and V1 and V2 are the potential energies of the system at
and respectively. Recalling that the system starts from rest, for the
kinetic energies we have

T1 D 0; (2)
2
T2 D 12 mAC vB2 C 21 IB .!AC /22
2
C 12 mCE vD2 C 21 ID .!CE /22 1 2

C2 2 mP vP 2 ; (3)

where, !AC and !CE are the angular speeds of AC and CE, respectively,
vB and vD are the speeds of B and D, respectively, mAC is the mass of AC ,
mCD is the mass of CD, mP is the mass of each of the counterweights, IB
is the mass moments of inertia of AC about B, and ID is the mass moment
of inertia of CE about D. Keeping in mind that W is the weight of the entire
door and that the door consists of two identical parts, we have
  2
W WP 1 W H
mAC D mCE D ; mP D ; IB D ID D : (4)
2g g 12 2g 2

For the potential energies, we have

V1 D WAC yB1 C WCE yD1 C 2WP yP1 ; (5)


V2 D WAC yB2 C WCE yD2 C 2WP yP 2 ; (6)
August 10, 2009
1104 Solutions Manual

where
WAC D 12 W; and WCE D 12 W; (7)
As discussed in Example 8.5 (on p. 608 of the textbook), the panels move in such a way that the angles
formed by them with a horizontal line going through C remain always equal. This implies that

.!AC /2 D .!CE /2 ; (8)

Furthermore, observe that at points B and D are the bottom of their respective trajectories. Hence, we
must have
vB2 D vD2 D 0: (9)
The above result implies that in point B is the instantaneous venter of rotation of AC . In turn, this implies
that
H 4vA2
.!AC /2 D vA2 ) .!AC /2 D : (10)
4 H
We now observe that the counterweights P move with the same speed as point A, i.e.,

vP 2 D vA2 : (11)

Finally we observe that

yB1 D H; yD1 D H; yB2 D 34 H; yD2 D 14 H; yP 2 D yP1 C 14 H: (12)

Substituting Eqs. (4), and Eqs. (8)(11) into the expressions for the kinetic energies, after simplification,
we have that Eqs. (2) and (3) can be rewritten as
 
W WP 2
T1 D 0 and T2 D C vA2 : (13)
6g g

Substituting Eqs. (7) and (12) into Eqs. (5) and (6), after simplification, we have
 
WH H
V1 D W H C 2WP yP1 and V2 D C 2WP yP1 C : (14)
2 4

Now, substituting Eqs. (13) and (14) into Eq. (1), we have
   
W WP 2 WH H
W H C 2WP yP1 D C vA2 C C 2WP yP1 C : (15)
6g g 2 4

Recalling that we are given the maximum admissible value of vA2 , setting vA2 equal to such a value, allows
us to treat Eq. (15) as an equation in the single unknown WP whose solution is

2
3gH vA2
WP D 2
W D 800 lb;
3gH C 6vA2

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , H D 30 ft, vA2 D 0:5 ft=s, and
W D 800 lb.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1105

Problem 8.37

Torsional springs provide a simple propulsion mechanism for toy cars. When the rear wheels are rotated as
if the car were moving backward, they cause a torsional spring (with one end attached to the axle and the
other to the body of the car) to wind up and store energy. Therefore, a simple way to charge the spring is
to place the car onto a surface and to pull it backward, making sure that the wheels roll without slipping.
Note that the torsional spring can only be wound by pulling the car backward; that is, the forward motion
of the car unwinds the spring.
Let the weight of the car (body and wheels) be W D 5 oz, the weight of each of the wheels be Ww D
0:15 oz, and the radius of the wheels be r D 0:25 in:, where the wheels roll without slip and can be treated
as uniform disks. Neglecting friction internal to the car and letting the cars torsional spring be linear with
constant k t D 0:0002 ftlb=rad, determine the maximum speed achieved by the car if it is released from
rest after pulling it back a distance L D 0:75 ft from a position in which the spring is unwound.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, having assumed that the wheels roll
without slip, we can conclude that no external force does work on the
car due to the fact the car as a whole moves in a direction perpendicular
to gravity. However, the internal torque provided by the (internal)
torsional spring does work. This work term can be accounted for via
the potential energy of the system. We define to be the position of the
car at release (from rest) with the torsional spring wound as described
in the problem statemen. Position 2 is the position corresponding to
when the spring first becomes unwound. Hence, we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, recalling that the system is released from rest and that the translational component of the velocity of
the wheels is the same as the velocity of the car as a whole, we have
   
1W 2 1 2 1 2
T1 D 0 and T2 D 2 vG2 C 2 2 IA !A2 C 2 2 IB !B2 ; (2)
g
vG is the speed of the center of mass of the car and therefore of the car as a whole, !A is the angular speed of
the rear wheels, !B is the angular speed of the front wheels, and where IA and IB are the mass moments of
inertia of the rear and front wheel, respectively, with respect to their own center of mass and are given by

1W W 2
IA D 2 g r2 and IB D 1
2 r ; (3)
g
where we have accounted for the fact that all wheels are identical to one another.
Letting 1 describe the initial wounding angle, i.e., the angle by which the wheels rotate when the car
is initially pulled backwards by the distance L, and recalling that the cars torsional spring is completely
unwound at position two, we have

V1 D 12 k t 12 and V2 D 0: (4)


August 10, 2009
1106 Solutions Manual

We now deal with the kinematic equations of the problems. Since 1 describes the initial wounding angle,
i.e., the angle by which the wheels rotate when the car is initially pulled backwards by the distance L, and
since the wheels are identical to one another and roll without slip, then we must have
L vG2 vG2
1 D ; !A2 D ; and !B2 D : (5)
r r r
Substituting Eqs. (3) and the last two of Eqs (5) into Eqs. (2), we have that the kinetic energies can be
rewritten as
W C 2Ww 2
T1 D 0 and T2 D vG2 : (6)
2g
Then substituting Eqs. (4) and (6) into Eq. (1), and accounting for the first of Eqs. (5) we obtain
 2 s
1 L W C 2W w 2 k t gL2
k
2 t r D v G2 ) v G2 D : (7)
2g r 2 .W C 2Ww /

Recalling that vG2 is the maximum speed of the car as a whole, evaluating the above expression we then have

vmax D 5:02 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: k t D 0:0002 ftlb=rad, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , L D 0:75 ft,
r D 0:25 in: D 0:2083 ft, W D 5 oz D 0:3125 lb, and Ww D 0:15 oz D 0:009375 lb.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1107

Problem 8.38

Torsional springs provide a simple propulsion mechanism for toy cars. When the rear wheels are rotated as
if the car were moving backward, they cause a torsional spring (with one end attached to the axle and the
other to the body of the car) to wind up and store energy. Therefore, a simple way to charge the spring is
to place the car onto a surface and to pull it backward, making sure that the wheels roll without slipping.
Note that the torsional spring can only be wound by pulling the car backward; that is, the forward motion
of the car unwinds the spring.
Let the weight of the car (body and wheels) be W D 5 oz, the weight of each of the wheels be Ww D
0:15 oz, and the radius of the wheels be r D 0:25 in:, where the wheels roll without slip and can be treated
as uniform disks. In addition, let the torque M provided by the nonlinear torsional spring be given by
M D  3 , where D 0:510 6 ftlb=rad3 ,  is the angular displacement of the rear axle, and the minus
sign in front of indicates that M acts opposite to the direction of  . Neglecting any friction internal to
the car, determine the maximum speed achieved by the car if it is released from rest after pulling it back a
distance L D 0:75 ft from a position in which the spring is unwound.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, having assumed that the wheels roll
without slip, we can conclude that no external force does work on the
car due to the fact the car as a whole moves in a direction perpendicular
to gravity. However, the internal torque provided by the (internal)
torsional spring does work. This work term can be accounted for via
the potential energy of the system. We define to be the position of the
car at release (from rest) with the torsional spring wound as described
in the problem statemen. Position 2 is the position corresponding to
when the spring first becomes unwound. Hence, we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, recalling that the system is released from rest and that the translational component of the velocity of
the wheels is the same as the velocity of the car as a whole, we have
   
1W 2 1 2 1 2
T1 D 0 and T2 D 2 vG2 C 2 2 IA !A2 C 2 2 IB !B2 ; (2)
g

vG is the speed of the center of mass of the car and therefore of the car as a whole, !A is the angular speed of
the rear wheels, !B is the angular speed of the front wheels, and where IA and IB are the mass moments of
inertia of the rear and front wheel, respectively, with respect to their own center of mass and are given by

1W W 2
IA D 2 g r2 and IB D 1
2 r ; (3)
g
where we have accounted for the fact that all wheels are identical to one another.

August 10, 2009


1108 Solutions Manual

To evaluate the potential energy of the spring, we need to intergrate


the expression of the moment with respect to . To do so, we refer
to the figure on the right, and we recall that the potential energy of
a force or a moment is equal to the negative of the work done by the
force or moment in question. Hence, we have
Z 
V D .work of M / D M d D
0
Z  
3
 d D 41  4 :
0

Hence, using the above result, letting 1 describe the initial wounding angle, i.e., the angle by which the
wheels rotate when the car is initially pulled backwards by the distance L, and recalling that the cars torsional
spring is completely unwound at position two, we have

V1 D 14 14 and V2 D 0: (4)

We now deal with the kinematic equations of the problems. Since 1 describes the initial wounding angle,
i.e., the angle by which the wheels rotate when the car is initially pulled backwards by the distance L, and
since the wheels are identical to one another and roll without slip, then we must have
L vG2 vG2
1 D ; !A2 D ; and !B2 D : (5)
r r r
Substituting Eqs. (3) and the last two of Eqs (5) into Eqs. (2), we have that the kinetic energies can be
rewritten as
W C 2Ww 2
T1 D 0 and T2 D vG2 : (6)
2g
Then substituting Eqs. (4) and (6) into Eq. (1), and accounting for the first of Eqs. (5) we obtain
 4 s
1 L W C 2Ww 2 gL4
4 r D vG2 ) vG2 D : (7)
2g 2r 4 .W C 2Ww /

Recalling that vG2 is the maximum speed of the car as a whole, evaluating the above expression we then have

vmax D 6:39 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: D 0:510 6 ftlb=rad3 , g D 32:2 ft=s2 , L D 0:75 ft,
r D 0:25 in: D 0:2083 ft, W D 5 oz D 0:3125 lb, and Ww D 0:15 oz D 0:009375 lb.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1109

Problem 8.39

Torsional springs provide a simple propulsion mechanism for toy cars. When the rear wheels are rotated as
if the car were moving backward, they cause a torsional spring (with one end attached to the axle and the
other to the body of the car) to wind up and store energy. Therefore, a simple way to charge the spring is
to place the car onto a surface and to pull it backward, making sure that the wheels roll without slipping.
Note that the torsional spring can only be wound by pulling the car backward; that is, the forward motion
of the car unwinds the spring.
Let the mass of the car (body and wheels) be m D 120 g, the mass of each of the wheels be mw D 5 g, and
the radius of the wheels be r D 6 mm, where the wheels roll without slip and can be treated as uniform
disks. In addition, let the cars torsional spring be linear with constant k t D 0:00025 Nm=rad. Neglecting
any friction internal to the car, if the angle of the incline is  D 25 and the car is released from rest
after pulling it back a distance L D 25 cm from a position in which the spring is unwound, determine the
maximum distance dmax that the car will travel up the incline (from its release point), the maximum speed
vmax achieved by the car, and the distance dvmax (from the release point) at which vmax is achieved.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, having assumed that the wheels roll without
slip, we can conclude that the only external force that does work on the
car is gravity. In addition, the internal torque provided by the (internal)
torsional spring does work. This work term can be accounted for via
the potential energy of the internal torsional spring. We define to be
the position of the car at release (from rest) with the torsional spring
wound as described in the problem statemen. Position 2 is the position
corresponding corresponding to when the car having moved a distance d up the incline. Hence, we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, recalling the translational component of the velocity of the wheels is the same as the velocity of the
car as a whole, we have
   
1 2 1 2 1 2
T1 D 0 and T2 D 2 mvG2 C 2 2 IA !A2 C 2 2 IB !B2 ; (2)

vG is the speed of the center of mass of the car and therefore of the car as a whole, !A is the angular speed of
the rear wheels, !B is the angular speed of the front wheels, and where IA and IB are the mass moments of
inertia of the rear and front wheel, respectively, with respect to their own center of mass and are given by

IA D 12 mr 2 and IB D 12 mr 2 ; (3)

where we have accounted for the fact that all wheels are identical to one another.
Before proceeding further, we observe that in determining the maximum distance achieved by the car, we
will set T2 D 0.
August 10, 2009
1110 Solutions Manual

Referring to the figure on the right, the datum for gravity has been chosen
to coincide with the mass center of the car in . Next let 1 describe the
initial wounding angle, i.e., the angle by which the wheels rotate when
the car is initially pulled backwards by the distance L. Then we have
(
1
1 2 k t 22 C mgd sin  for d < L;
V1 D 2 k t 1 and V2 D 2 (4)
mgd sin  for d  L;

where for d < L the spring has is not fully unwound whereas for d > L no more potential energy in stored
in the spring.
We now deal with the kinematic equations of the problems. Again we recall that 1 describes the initial
wounding angle, i.e., the angle by which the wheels rotate when the car is initially pulled backwards by the
distance L. Similarly, 2 is the angle corresponding to a wounding over a distance L d . Hence, recalling
that the wheels are identical to one another and roll without slip, then we must have
L L d vG2 vG2
1 D ; 2 D ; !A2 D ; and !B2 D : (5)
r r r r
We are now ready to proceed to solve the problem. We start with the determination of the maximum
distance traveled and then we proceed with the determination of the maximum speed achieved by the car.

Determination of maximum distance traveled. The maximum distance traveled dmax is achieved when
the car comes to a stop for the first time and therefore T2 D 0. We do not currently know if dmax  L or not.
Hence, we derive a solution under the working assumption that indeed dmax  L and then we will verify
whether or not our working assumption is satisfied. Hence, given that T1 D 0 and T2 D 0, substituting
Eqs. (4) for the case with d D dmax  L into Eq. (1), and accounting for the first of Eqs. (5), we have
 2
1 L
2 kt r D mgdmax sin : (6)

which can be solved for dmax to obtain

k t L2
dmax D D 0:436 m;
2r 2 mg sin 

where we have used the following numerical data: k t D 0:00025 N=m, L D 25 cm D 0:2500 m, r D
6 mm D 0:006000 m, m D 120 g D 0:1200 kg, g D 9:81 m=s2 ,  D 25 . Because the result we have
obtained is consistent with the working assumption used to derive it, the result in question is indeed the
answer to the first part of the problem.

Determination of the maximum speed. The maximum speed is necessarily achieved while the spring is
actively propelling the car. Therefore, we proceed to determine the maximum speed using Eqs. (4) for the
case with d < L. Clearly, this is a working assumption and we will need to verify that the result obtained
under such an assumption is consistent with the assumption in question.
Substituting Eqs. (3) and the last two of Eqs. (5) in Eqs. (2) and simplifying, we have
2
T1 D 0 and T2 D 21 .m C 2mw /vG2 : (7)

Next, recalling that we are working under the assumption that d < L, substituting Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (4) and
simplifying, we have
k t L2 k t .L d /2
V1 D and V2 D : (8)
2r 2 2r 2 C mgd sin 
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1111

Substituting Eqs. (7) and (8) into Eq. (1), we have

k t L2 k t .L d /2 2 2 k t d.2L d / 2mgdr 2 sin 


D C 21 .m C 2mw /vG2 ) vG2 D : (9)
2r 2 2r 2 C mgd sin  r 2 .m C 2mw /
2
We need to find the value of d for which vG2 is maximum. For this purpose observe that vG2 achieves
2
its maximum for the same value of d for which vG2 is maximum, and maximizing vG2 is simpler than
maximizing vG2 (in this problem). Using this fact, we then have

2
dvG2 2k t .L d / 2mgr 2 sin 
D0 ) D0
d.d / r 2 .m C 2mw /
kt L mgr 2 sin 
) dvmax D D 0:1784 m; (10)
kt
where we have used the following numerical data: k t D 0:00025 N=m, L D 25 cm D 0:2500 m, m D
120 g D 0:1200 kg, g D 9:81 m=s2 , r D 6 mm D 0:006000 m, and  D 25 . We now observe that the result
we have just obtained is consistent with our working assumption, i.e., d < L and can therefore be considered
acceptable. Then, recalling that vG is also the speed of the car as a whole, setting d in the last of Eqs. (9)
equal to dvmax of Eq. (10), we can then compute the value of vmax . This gives

vmax D 1:30 m=s for dvmax D 0:178 m;

where we have used the following numerical data: k t D 0:00025 N=m, L D 25 cm D 0:2500 m, m D
120 g D 0:1200 kg, g D 9:81 m=s2 , r D 6 mm D 0:006000 m,  D 25 , and mw D 5 g D 0:005000 kg.

August 10, 2009


1112 Solutions Manual

Problems 8.40 and 8.41

The double pulley D has mass of 15 kg, center of mass G coinciding with its
geometric center, radius of gyration kG D 10 cm, outer radius ro D 15 cm, and
inner radius ri D 7:5 cm. It is connected to the pulley P with radius R via a cord of
negligible mass that unwinds from the inner and outer spools of the double pulley
D. The crate C , which has a mass of 20 kg, is released from rest.

Problem 8.40 Neglecting the mass of the pulley P , determine the speed of the
crate C and the angular velocity of the pulley D after the crate has dropped a
distance h D 2 m.

Problem 8.41 Assuming that the pulley P has a mass of 1:5 kg and a radius of
gyration kA D 3:5 cm, determine the speed of the crate C and the angular velocity
of the pulley D after the crate has dropped a distance h D 2 m.

Solution to 8.40

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Let be the
position at release and be the position achieved by the system when
the crate C drops a distance h. Since the only force doing work in going
from to is gravity, the energy of the system is conserved and we
can write
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, given the choice of datum, observing that point G is fixed, the
mass of pulley P is being neglected, and recalling that the system is
released from rest, we have

T1 D 0; (2)
V1 D mC gyC1 ; (3)
2 2
T2 D 21 IG !D2 C 12 mC vC 2; (4)
V2 D mC gyC 2 ; (5)

where mD is the mass of pulley D, mC is the mass of the crate, yC1 and
yC 2 are the vertical coordinates of the crate at and , respectively, IG
is the mass moment of inertia of pulley D relative to its won center of mass G, vC is the speed of the crate,
and !D is the component of the angular velocity of pulley D in the direction.
For the mass moment of inertia IG we can write
2
IG D mD kG : (6)

As far as the kinematics of the problem is concerned, lets observe that since G is a fixed we have

vEE D ro !D |O and vEF D ri !D |O: (7)

Next, since the rope connecting the pulleys is assumed not to slip relative to any of the pulleys, we have

vEH D vEE and vEI D vEF : (8)

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1113

Now observe that points H and I belong to the same rigid body, namely pulley P . Treating P as a rigid
body, and letting R denote the radius of pulley P , we must have
ro ri
vEI D vEH C !EP  rEI =H ) ri !D |O D ro !D |O C !P kO  .2R {O/ ) !P D !D ; (9)
2R
where !EP is the angular velocity of pulley P . Observing that R D 12 .ro ri /, we can rewrite !P simply as

!P D !D : (10)

Using this result, we can the say that

vEC D vEA D vEH C !EP  rEA=H D ro !D |O C !D kO  21 .ro ri / {O D 1


2 .ro C ri /!D |O: (11)

The above equation implies that


2 1 2 2
vC 2 D 4 .ro C ri / !D2 : (12)
Finally, we observe that
yC 2 D yC1 h: (13)
Therefore, substituting Eqs. (2)(5) into Eq. (1) and accounting for Eqs. (6), (12), and (13), we have
2 2
mC gyC1 D 12 mD kG !D2 C 21 mC 14 .ro C ri /2 !D2
2
 
C mC g.yC1 h/; (14)

which, keeping in mind that we expect !D2 > 0, is an equation in !D2 whose solution is
s
p ghmC
!D2 D 2 2 2
: (15)
4kG mD C mC .ri C ro /2

Substituting this result in Eq. (12) and solving for vC 2 , we have


s
p ghmC .ri C ro /2
vC 2 D 2 2
: (16)
4kG mD C mC .ri C ro /2

Evaluating the above two results numerically, we have

vC D 4:96 m=s and !ED D .44:1 rad=s/ kO ;

where we have dropped the subscript 2 for simplicity, and where we have used the following numerical data:
g D 9:81 m=s2 , h D 2 m, mC D 20 kg, kG D 10 cm D 0:1000 m, mD D 15 kg, ri D 7:5 cm D 0:07500 m,
and ro D 15 cm D 0:1500 m.

August 10, 2009


1114 Solutions Manual

Solution to 8.41

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Let be the
position at release and be the position achieved by the system when
the crate C drops a distance h. Since the only force doing work in going
from to is gravity, the energy of the system is conserved and we
can write
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (17)
where, given the choice of datum, observing that point G is fixed, and
recalling that the system is released from rest, we have

T1 D 0; (18)
V1 D mC gyC1 C mP gyA1 ; (19)
2 2 2 2
T2 D 21 IG !D2 C 12 mC vC 1 1
2 C 2 mP vA C 2 IA !P ; (20)
V2 D mC gyC 2 C mP gyA2 ; (21)

where mD is the mass of pulley D, mC is the mass of the crate, yC1 and
yC 2 are the vertical coordinates of the crate at and , respectively,
IG is the mass moment of inertia of pulley D relative to its own center
of mass G, vC is the speed of the crate, !D is the component of the angular velocity of pulley D in the
direction, yA1 and yA2 are the vertical coordinates of the mass center A of pulley P at and , respectively,
vA is the speed of A, !P is the component of the angular velocity of pulley P in the direction, and IA is
the mass moment of inertia of pulley P with respect to its own center of mass.
For the mass moments of inertia IG and IA we can write
2
IG D mD kG and IA D mP kA2 : (22)

As far as the kinematics of the problem is concerned, lets observe that since G is a fixed we have

vEE D ro !D |O and vEF D ri !D |O: (23)

Next, since the rope connecting the pulleys is assumed not to slip relative to any of the pulleys, we have

vEH D vEE and vEI D vEF : (24)

Now observe that points H and I belong to the same rigid body, namely pulley P . Treating P as a rigid
body, and letting R denote the radius of pulley P , we must have
ro ri
vEI D vEH C !EP  rEI =H ) ri !D |O D ro !D |O C !P kO  .2R {O/ ) !P D !D ; (25)
2R
where !EP is the angular velocity of pulley P . Observing that R D 12 .ro ri /, we can rewrite !P simply as

!P D !D : (26)

Using this result, we can the say that

vEC D vEA D vEH C !EP  rEA=H D ro !D |O C !D kO  21 .ro ri / {O D 1


2 .ro C ri /!D |O: (27)

The above equation implies that


2 2 1 2 2
vC 2 D vA2 D 4 .ro C ri / !D2 : (28)
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1115

Finally, we observe that


yC 2 D yC1 h and yA2 D yA1 h: (29)
Therefore, substituting Eqs. (18)(21) into Eq. (17) and accounting for Eqs. (22), (26), (28), and (29), we
have

2 2
mC gyC1 C mP gyA1 D 12 mD kG !D2 C 12 .mC C mP / 14 .ro C ri /2 !D2
2
 

1 2 2
2 mP kA !D2 C mC g.yC1 h/ C mP g.yA2 h/; (30)

which, keeping in mind that we expect !D2 > 0, is an equation in !D2 whose solution is
s
p gh.mC C mP /
!D2 D 2 2 2 2
: (31)
4kG mD C 4kA mP C .mC C mP /.ri C ro /2

Substituting this result in Eq. (28) and solving for vC 2 , we have


s
p gh.mC C mP /.ri C ro /2
vC 2 D 2 : (32)
4kG mD C 4kA2 mP C .mC C mP /.ri C ro /2
2

Evaluating the above two results numerically, we have

vC D 5:02 m=s and !ED D .44:6 rad=s/ kO ;

where we have dropped the subscript 2 for simplicity, and where we have used the following numerical data:
g D 9:81 m=s2 , h D 2 m, mC D 20 kg, kG D 10 cm D 0:1000 m, mD D 15 kg, ri D 7:5 cm D 0:07500 m,
ro D 15 cm D 0:1500 m, mP D 1:5 kg, and kA D 3:5 cm D 0:03500 m.

August 10, 2009


1116 Solutions Manual

Problems 8.42 through 8.44

The uniform thin rod AB is pin-connected to the slider S , which moves along
the frictionless guide, and to the disk D, which rolls without slip over the
horizontal surface. The pins at A and B are frictionless, and the system is
released from rest. Neglect the vertical dimension of S .

Problem 8.42 Letting L D 1:75 m and R D 0:6 m, assuming that S and D


are of negligible mass, that the mass of rod AB is mAB D 7 kg, and that the
system is released from the angle 0 D 65 , determine the speed of the slider
S when it strikes the ground.

Problem 8.43 Letting L D 4:5 ft and R D 1:2 ft, assuming that AB is of


negligible mass, the weight of S is WS D 3 lb, D is a uniform disk of weight
WD D 9 lb, and the system is released from the angle 0 D 67 , determine the
speed of the slider S when it strikes the ground.

Problem 8.44 Letting L D 1:75 m and R D 0:6 m, assuming that the mass
of S is mS D 4:2 kg, D is a uniform disk of mass mD D 12 kg, the mass of
AB is mAB D 7 kg, and that the system is released from the angle  D 69 ,
determine the speed and the direction of motion of point B when the slider S
strikes the ground.

Solution to 8.42

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. We define


to be the position of the system at release and to be the position
corresponding to S striking the ground. Since the only force doing
work in going from to is gravity, the energy of the system is
conserved and we can write
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, recalling that the system is released from rest and that the
masses of the slider as well as of the disk are being neglected, we
have
T1 D 0; (2)
2
T2 D 21 mAB vG2 C 21 IG .!AB /22 ; (3)
where vG is the speed of G, which is the center of mass of bar AB,
IG is the mass moment of inertia of the bar AB with respect to G, and !AB is the component of the angular
speed of AB.
For the mass moment of inertia we have
1
IG D mAB L2 : (4)
12
For the potential energies, choosing the datum as shown in the figure, and recalling that the size of the
slider is being ignored, we have
V1 D mAB g.R C 12 L sin 1 / and V2 D mAB g 12 R :

(5)

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1117

Referring to the figure on the right, we now consider the kinematic


equations for this problem. We denote by C the instantaneous center of
rotation of the bar. Because the distance between C and the slider is L cos ,
we must have that the angular speed of the bar is
vS
!AB D : (6)
L cos 
Furthermore, since the distance between C and G is equal to L=2, we must
also have
L vS
vG D !AB D : (7)
2 2 cos 
where we have used the expression for !AB in Eq. (6). Next, we now observe
that, in we have p
L2 R 2
cos 2 D : (8)
L
Using Eqs. (6)(8), we can summarize the kinematics of the problem at as follows:

vS 2 L vS2 2
vG2 D p and .!AB /22 Dp : (9)
2 L2 R 2 L2 R2
Now, substituting Eqs. (4) and (9) into Eq. (3), and simplifying, we have

mAB L2
T2 D v2 : (10)
6.L2 R2 / S 2
Then substituting Eqs. (2), (5), and (10) into Eq. (1), we have

mAB L2
mAB g.R C 21 L sin 1 / D v 2 C mAB g 1

6.L2 R2 / S 2 2R ; (11)

which is an equation in the only unknown vS 2 whose solution is


p q
3
vS 2 D g.L2 R2 /.R C L sin 1 /
L
which can be evaluated to obtain
vS D 7:53 m=s;

where we have dropped the subscript 2 for convenience, and where we have used the following numerical
data: L D 1:75 m, g D 9:81 m=s2 , R D 0:6 m, and 1 D 65 .

August 10, 2009


1118 Solutions Manual

Solution to 8.43

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. We define


to be the position of the system at release and to be the position
corresponding to S striking the ground. Since the only force doing
work in going from to is gravity, the energy of the system is
conserved and we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (12)

where, recalling that the system is released from rest,that the mass
of the bar AB is negligible, and that point Q is the instantaneous
center of rotation of the disk due to the rolling without slip condition,
we have

T1 D 0; (13)
WS 2 2
T2 D 21 v C 1 IQ !D2 ; (14)
g S2 2
where vS is the speed of the slider, IQ is the mass moment of inertia
of the disk D with respect to point Q, and !D is the component of the angular velocity of the disk D in the
direction.
For the mass moment of inertia we have

1 WD 2 WD 2
IQ D 2 R C R D 0:6037 slugft2 ; (15)
g g
where we have used the parallel axis theorem to express IQ , and where we have used the following numerical
data: L D 4:5 ft, WD D 9 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , and R D 1:2 ft.
For the potential energies, choosing the datum as shown in the figure, and recalling that the size of the
slider is being ignored, we have

V1 D WS .R C L sin 1 / and V2 D 0: (16)

We now consider the kinematic equations for this problem. Here we need to relate the speed of the slider
S to the angular velocity of the disk. We start with observing that, S will only move in the vertical direction,
i.e.,
vES D vSy |O: (17)
We now observe that because the physical dimensions of S are being neglected, S essentially coincides with
point A. Hence, accounting for the fact that B can only move in the horizontal dierection, we have

vEB D vES C !EAB  rEB=A ) vBx {O D vSy |O C !AB kO  L.cos  {O sin  |O/
sin  vSy
) vBx D vSy and !AB D ; (18)
cos  L cos 
where the last two results have been obtained by expanding the cross product and equating the left-hand
side to the right-hand side on a component by component basis. Now that we have an expression for vBx ,
recalling that the disk D rolls without slip, we have

vBx vSy sin 


!D D D (19)
R R cos 
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1119

We now observe that, in we have


sin 2 R
D p : (20)
cos 2 L2 R2
2
Hence, observing that vS2 D vSy , substituting Eq. (20) into Eq. (19), in we have

2 vS2 2
!D2 D : (21)
L2 R 2
Substituting Eqs. (21) into Eq. (14) and simplifying, we have
 
1 IQ WS 2
T2 D C vS 2 ; (22)
2 L2 R 2 g

Hence, recalling Eq. (13), we have that T1 and T2 can be given the following expressions:

T1 D 0 and T2 D .0:06263 slug/vS2 2 ; (23)

where we have used Eqs. (15) and the following numerical parameters: L D 4:5 ft, R D 1:2 ft, WS D 3 lb,
and g D 32:2 ft=s2 . Next, evaluating Eqs. (16) numerically, we have

V1 D 16:03 ftlb and V2 D 0; (24)

where we have used the following numerical data: WS D 3 lb, R D 1:2 ft, L D 4:5 ft, and 1 D 67 .
Next, substituting Eqs. (23) and (24) into Eq. (12), we have

16:03 ftlb D .0:06263 slug/vS2 2 ; (25)

which is an equation in the only unknown vS 2 whose solution is

vS D 16:0 ft=s;

where we have dropped the subscript 2 for convenience.

August 10, 2009


1120 Solutions Manual

Solution to 8.44

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. We define


to be the position of the system at release and to be the position
corresponding to S striking the ground. Since the only force doing
work in going from to is gravity, the energy of the system is
conserved and we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (26)

where, recalling that the system is released from rest and that point
Q is the instantaneous center of rotation of the disk due to the rolling
without slip condition, we have

T1 D 0; (27)
T2 D 12 mS vS2 2 C 12 mAB vG2
2
C 21 IG .!AB /22 C 12 IQ !D2
2
; (28)

where vS is the speed of the slider, vG is the speed of G, which is


the center of mass of bar AB, IG is the mass moment of inertia of
the bar AB with respect to G, !AB is the component of the angular velocity of AB in the direction, IQ is
the mass moment of inertia of the disk D with respect to point Q, and !D is the component of the angular
velocity of the disk D in the direction.
For the mass moments of inertia we have
1
IG D mAB L2 D 1:786 kgm2 and IQ D 12 mD R2 C mD R2 D 6:480 kgm2 ; (29)
12
where we have used the parallel axis theorem to express IQ , and where we have used the following numerical
data: mAB D 7 kg, L D 1:75 m, mD D 12 kg, and R D 0:6 m.
For the potential energies, choosing the datum as shown in the figure, and recalling that the size of the
slider is being ignored, we have

V1 D mS g.R C L sin 1 / C mAB g.R C 12 L sin 1 / and V2 D mAB g 12 R :



(30)

We now consider the kinematic equations for this problem. Here we need to relate the angular velocity
of point B to the velocity of the slider S . We start with observing that, B will only move in the horizontal
direction and that the disk D rolls without slip. Hence, we can write
vBx
vEB D vBx {O and !D D : (31)
R
Next, observe that S can only move in the vertical direction and that it must move like point A. Hence, we
have

vES D vSy |O D vEB C !EAB  rEA=B ) vSy |O D vBx {O D !AB kO  L. cos  {O C sin  |O/
cos  vBx
) vSy D vBx and !AB D ; (32)
sin  L sin 
where the last two results have been obtained by expanding the cross product and equating the left-hand side
to the right-hand side on a component by component basis. Next, using the the first of Eqs. (31) and the last
of Eqs. (32), we then have
cos 
vEG D vEB C !EAB  rEG=B ) vEG D 21 vBx {O 1
2 vBx sin  : (33)
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1121

We now observe that, in we have


p
cos 2 L2 R 2 R
D and sin 2 D : (34)
sin 2 R L

Hence, observing that vS2 D vSy


2 2
, vBx D vB2
, substituting Eqs. (34) into the last two relations in Eqs. (32), in
we have
2 2
2 L R2 vB2
vS2 2 D vB2 and .! AB /2
2 D : (35)
R2 R2
2
Furthermore, substituting Eqs. (34) into the last of Eqs. (33) and then computing vG , we have

L2 R2
 
2 1 2
vG2 D 4 1C vB2 : (36)
R2

Substituting Eqs. (35) and (36) into Eq. (28) and simplifying, we have

4IG C 4IQ C .mAB C 4mS /L2 4mS R2 2


T2 D vB2 : (37)
8R2
Hence, recalling Eq. (27), we have that T1 and T2 can be given the following expressions:
2
T1 D 0 and T2 D .34:69 kg/vB2 ; (38)

where we have used Eqs. (29) and the following numerical parameters: L D 1:75 m, mAB D 7 kg, mS D
4:2 kg, and R D 0:6 m. Next, evaluating Eqs. (30) numerically, we have

V1 D 189:3 J and V2 D 20:60 J; (39)

where we have used the following numerical data: mS D 4:2 kg, g D 9:81 m=s2 , R D 0:6 m, L D 1:75 m,
1 D 69 , and mAB D 7 kg.
Next, substituting Eqs. (38) and (39) into Eq. (26), we have
2
189:3 J D 20:60 J C .34:69 kg/vB2 ; (40)

which is an equation in the only unknown vB2 whose solution is

vB D 2:21 m=s;

where we have dropped the subscript 2 for convenience.


As far as the direction of motion of point B in is concerned, substituting the first of Eqs. (34) into the
second to the last of Eqs. (32) and solving for .vBx /2 , we have
R
.vBx /2 D p .vSy /2 : (41)
L2 R 2
Finally, we observe that in the slider strikes the ground and therefore is moving in the negative y direction,
i.e., .vSy /2 < 0. This implies that in .vBx /2 < 0 and we conclude that

In B is moving to the left.

August 10, 2009


1122 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.45

The figure shows the cross section of a garage door with length L D 2:5 m
and mass m D 90 kg. At the ends A and B there are rollers of negligible mass
constrained to move in a vertical and a horizontal guide, respectively. The
doors motion is assisted by two counterweights (only one counterweight is
shown), each of mass mC D 42:5 kg. If the door is released from rest when
horizontal, neglecting friction and modeling the door as a uniform thin plate,
determine the speed with which B strikes the left end of the horizontal guide.

Solution
Note: The problem statement contains a typographical error. In this solution we set mC D 22 kg instead of
the (incorrect) value of 42:5 kg.
Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity. Let be
the position at release and be the position achieved by the door when
B strikes the left end of the horizontal guide. Since energy is conserved
in going from to , we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, given the choice of datum, modeling the door as a rigid body and
the counterweights as particles, and recalling that the door is released
from rest, we have

T1 D 0; (2)
V1 D 2mC gyC1 C mAB gL; (3)
1 2 1 2 1 2

T2 D 2 mAB vG2 C 2 IG !d 2 C 2 2 mC vC 2 ; (4)
1
V2 D 2mC gyC 2 C 2 LmAB g; (5)

where mAB is the mass of the door, yC1 and yC 2 are the vertical coordinates of the counterweights at and
, respectively, IG is the mass moment of inertia of the door with respect to the doors center of mass G, vG
is the speed of G, and !d is the angular speed of the door.
Now observe that in the door point A is at the very bottom of its trajectory. This implies that vA2 D 0
and that A is the instantaneous center of rotation of the door. In turn, this implies that the angular speed of the
door in is !d 2 D vB2 =L, and that vG2 D !d 2 .L=2/ D vB2 =2. Hence, observing that the counterweights
C are directly attached to point A, we have

vG2 D 21 vB2 ; vC 2 D 0; !d 2 D vB2 =L; and yC 2 D yC1 C L: (6)

Substituting Eqs. (2)(6) into Eq. (1), and solving for vB2 , we have
s
3 p
.vB /final D gL.mAB 4mC / D 1:28 m=s;
mAB

where we have written .vB /final for vB2 and where we have used the following numerical data: mAB D 90 kg,
g D 9:81 m=s2 , L D 2:5 m, and mC D 22 kg.
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1123

Problem 8.46

The uniform thin pin-connected bars AB, BC , and CD have masses mAB D
2:3 kg, mBC D 3:2 kg, and mCD D 5:0 kg, respectively. In addition, R D
0:75 m, L D 1:2 m, and H D 1:55 m. When bars AB and CD are vertical,
AB is rotating with angular speed !AB D 4 rad=s in the direction shown. At
this instant, the motor connected to AB starts to exert a constant torque M in
the direction opposite to !AB . If the motor stops AB after AB has rotated 90
counterclockwise, determine M and the maximum power output of the motor
during the stopping phase. In the final position,  D 64:36 and D 29:85 .

Solution

Referring to the FBD on the right, observe that the reaction forces at A
and D do no work because points A and D are fixed. The only forces
doing work are the weights of the bars in the system and the constant
moment M . Because the calculation of the work of the force system in
question is straightforward, it is indeed possible to solve this problem
via the application of the work-energy principle.
Referring to the problem statement and to the FBD, observe that we
have introduced angles , , and to describe the orientation of bars
AB, BC , and CD, respectively. In addition, we have labeled E, F , and
G the mass centers of bars AB, BC , and CD, respectively. We define as the position at which  D 90
and the position at which  D 0.
Then, the work-energy principle states that

T1 C V1 C .U1-2 /nc D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, observing that bars AB and CD are in fixed axis rotations about points A and D respectively, and
observing that in the system comes to a stop, we have

T1 D 12 IA .!AB /21 C 21 mBC vF


2 1 2 1 2
1 C 2 IF .!BC /1 C 2 ID .!CD /1 and T2 D 0; (2)
where !AB , !BC , !CD are the angular speeds of the bars AB, BC , and CD, respectively, and where IA is
the mass moment of inertia of bar AB about A, IF is the mass moment of inertia of bar BC about point
F , and ID is the mass moments of inertia of bar CD about D. The mass moments of inertia introduced are
given by
1 2 2 2
IA D 12 mAB R C mAB .R=2/ D 0:4312 kgm ; (3)
1 2 2
IF D 12 mBC L D 0:3840 kgm ; (4)
1 2 2 2
ID D 12 mCD H C mCD .H=2/ D 4:004 kgm ; (5)

where we have used the following numerical data: mAB D 2:3 kg, mBC D 3:2 kg, mCD D 5:0 kg,
R D 0:75 m, L D 1:2 m, and H D 1:55 m.
As far as the potential energy terms in Eq. (1) are concerned, using the datum shown, we have
R 1

V1 D mAB g C mBC gR C mCD g R 2H ; (6)
2
L 1

V2 D mBC g sin 2 C mCD g L sin 2 2H sin 2 : (7)
2
August 10, 2009
1124 Solutions Manual

Since the applied moment M is constant, and observing that both the moment and the angle  have been
defined positive if clockwise, then the work of M in going from to is

.U1-2 /nc D M.2 1 /: (8)

We now carry out the kinematic analysis of the system needed to compute the speeds that appear in the
kinetic energy expression and the angles that appear in the computation of the potential energy as well as the
work of the moment M . We being by observing that

1 D 90 ; 2 D 0; 1 D 0; 2 D D 29:85 ; 1 D 90 ; and 2 D  D 64:36 ; (9)

where we have used the values of  and given in the problem statement. As far as the velocity analysis is
concerned, we only need to determine the speeds of the system in because the system is at rest in . With
this in mind, observe that in bars AB and CD are parallel to one another and that the angular speed of bar
AB in is given and equal to 4 rad=s. Therefore, applying the concept of instantaneous center of rotation,
we see that the IC of bar BC in is at infinity. In turn, this implies that bar BC is in translation, which also
implies that the speed of points B and C must be the same and is equal to !AB R. Therefore, we have
R
.!AB /1 D !AB D 4 rad=s; vF 1 D !AB R; and .!CD /1 D !AB : (10)
H
Now that the kinematic analysis is complete, substituting Eqs. (3)(5) and Eqs. (10) into Eqs. (2), we
have
T1 D 25:35 J and T2 D 0; (11)
where we have used the following numerical data: !AB D 4 rad=s, R D 0:75 m, and H D 1:55 m. Next,
substituting Eqs. (9) into Eqs. (6)(8), we have

V1 D 30:78 J; V2 D 4:401 J; and .U1-2 /nc D 1:571M; (12)

mAB D 2:3 kg, mBC D 3:2 kg, mCD D 5:0 kg, R D 0:75 m, L D 1:2 m, H D 1:55 m, and g D 9:81 m=s2 .
Substituting Eqs. (11) and (12) into Eq. (1) and solving for M , we obtain

M D 32:93 Nm; (13)

which, when expressed to three significant figures, gives

M D 32:9 Nm:

As far as the maximum power output of the motor during the stopping phase is concerned, observe that,
between and , the torque provided by the engine is equal and opposite to the torque that appears in the
FBD shown. In addition, observe that the angular velocity of the motor must be equal to that of bar AB. This
implies that the torque acting on the motor acts in the same direction as the angular velocity of the motor. In
turn, this implies that the power output of the motor is given by the following expressions:

P D M!AB : (14)

Because M is constant, then the power is maximum when !AB is maximum, that is at . Hence, recalling
that .!AB /1 D 4 rad=s and using Eq. (13) to evaluate Eq. (14), we have

Pmax D 132 W:

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1125

Problem 8.47

A stick of length L and mass m is in equilibrium while standing on its end A when
end B is gently nudged to the right, causing the stick to fall. Model the stick as
a uniform slender bar, and assume that there is friction between the stick and the
ground. Under these assumptions, there is a value of , lets call it max , such that
the stick must start slipping before reaching max for any value of the coefficient
of static friction s . To find the value of max , follow the steps below.

(a) Letting F and N be the friction and normal forces, respectively, between the
stick and the ground, draw the FBD of the stick as it falls. Then set the sum
of forces in the horizontal and vertical directions equal to the corresponding
components of mE aG . Express the components of aEG in terms of , , P and .
R
P and .
Finally, express F and N as functions of  , , R

(b) Use the work-energy principle to find an expression for P 2 . /. Differentiate


the expression for P 2 . / with respect to time, and find an expression for R . /.

(c) Substitute the expressions for P 2 . / and R . / into the expressions for F and
N to obtain F and N as functions of . For impending slip, jF=N j must be
equal to the coefficient of static friction. Use this fact to determine max .

Solution

The FBD of the stick is shown on the right. Proceeding as indicated in


Step (a), summing forces in the horizontal and vertical directions, we have
X
Fx W F D maGx ; (1)
X
Fy W N mg D maGy ; (2)

where G is the center of mass of the stick, and where F and N are the
friction and normal forces at A, respectively. We will solve the problem
under the working assumption that the stick does not slip at A. Consistent
with this assumption, we then have that the position of G can be described as follows:

xG D 21 L sin  and yG D 12 L cos : (3)

Differentiating Eqs. (3) with respect to time, we have that the components of the velocity of G are

vGx D 21 LP cos  and vGy D 1 P


2 L sin : (4)

Differentiating Eqs. (4) with respect to time, we have that the components of the acceleration of G are

aGx D 21 L.R cos  P 2 sin  / and aGy D 1 R


2 L. sin  C P 2 cos  /: (5)

Substituting Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (1) and (2), and solving for F and N we have
 
L R
F D 21 mL.R cos  P 2 sin  / and N D mg 1 . sin  C P 2 cos  / : (6)
2g

August 10, 2009


1126 Solutions Manual

We now proceed with Step (b) of the solution. We begin by defining to the the position of the stick at
release and the position of the stick at a generic angle  following . We observe that, as long as A does
not slip, friction does no work and the system can be treated as being conservative. Hence, we can apply the
work-energy principle as follows:
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (7)
where, recalling that the system is released from rest and observing that while point A does not slip the stick
is in a fixed axis rotation about A, we have
L L
T1 D 0; V1 D mg ; T2 D 12 IA P 2 ; and V2 D mg cos ; (8)
2 2
in which IA is the mass moment of inertia of the stick about A and is therefore given by
 2
2 L
IA D 1
12 mL Cm D 13 mL2 ; (9)
2
where we have made use of the parallel axis theorem. Next, substituting Eq. (8) into Eq. (7) and solving for
P 2 , we have
3g
P 2 D .1 cos  /; (10)
L
where we have also used the expression for IA given in Eq. (9). Then, differentiating Eq. (10) with respect to
time and solving for R , we have
3g 3g
2P R D .sin  /P ) R D sin : (11)
2L 2L

We now proceed with Step (c) of the solution. Substituting the expressions for P 2 and R given in Eqs. (10)
and (11) into the expressions for F and N in Eqs. (6), after simplification gives

F D 34 mg sin .3 cos  2/ and N D 14 mg.1 3 cos  /2 : (12)

We now consider the impending slip condition, which is the limiting case for the working assumption used
thus far. In an impending slip condition we would have jF=N j D s , where s is the coefficient of static
friction between the stick and the ground. Using Eqs. (12) to enforce this condition gives

F 3 sin .3 cos  2/
D
N .1 3 cos  /2 D s : (13)

Right now we are treating s as a given of the problem and, in principle, s could be a very large number.
With this in mind, if we were to solve Eq. (13) for , we would find slip the value of  at which the stick
would start slipping. Independently of slip , lets denote by 0 the value of  for which the denominator in
Eq. (13) goes to zero. This value is as follows:
1
1 3 cos 0 D 0 ) 0 D cos .1=3/ D 70:53 : (14)

The importance of this result is in the fact that jF=N j ! 1 as  ! 0 and therefore, no matter how large
s is, we would find that slip < 0 . Based on this result, we can then say that the maximum value of  what
we were seeking is equal to 0 , which, when expressed to three significant figures, is

max D 70:5 :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1127

Problem 8.48

A stick of length L and mass m is in equilibrium while standing on its end A when
the end B is gently nudged to the right, causing the stick to fall. Letting s be
the coefficient of static friction between the stick and the ground and modeling
the stick as a uniform slender bar, find the largest value of s for which the stick
slides to the left as well as the corresponding value of  at which sliding begins.
To solve this problem, follow the steps below.

(a) Let F and N be the friction and normal forces, respectively, between the stick
and the ground, and let F be positive to the right and N positive upward. Draw
the FBD of the stick as it falls. Then set the sum of forces in the horizontal and
vertical directions equal to the corresponding components of mE aG . Express
P R
the components of aEG in terms of , , and . Finally, express F and N as
functions of , P , and .
R

(b) Use the work-energy principle to find an expression for P 2 . /. Differentiate


the expression for P 2 . / with respect to time, and find an expression for R . /.

(c) Substitute the expressions for P 2 . / and R . / into the expressions for F
and N to obtain F and N as functions of . When slip is impending (i.e.,
when jF j D s jN j), jF=N j must be equal to the static coefficient of friction.
Therefore, compute the maximum value of jF=N j by differentiating it with
respect to  and setting the resulting derivative equal to zero.

Solution

The FBD of the stick is shown on the right. Proceeding as indicated in


Step (a), summing forces in the horizontal and vertical directions, we have
X
Fx W F D maGx ; (1)
X
Fy W N mg D maGy ; (2)
where G is the center of mass of the stick, and where F and N are the
friction and normal forces at A, respectively. We will solve the problem
under the working assumption that the stick does not slip at A. Consistent
with this assumption, we then have that the position of G can be described as follows:
xG D 21 L sin  and yG D 12 L cos : (3)
Differentiating Eqs. (3) with respect to time, we have that the components of the velocity of G are
vGx D 21 LP cos  and vGy D 1 P
2 L sin : (4)
Differentiating Eqs. (4) with respect to time, we have that the components of the acceleration of G are
aGx D 21 L.R cos  P 2 sin  / and aGy D 1 R
2 L. sin  C P 2 cos  /: (5)
Substituting Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (1) and (2), and solving for F and N we have
 
1 R P 2 L R P 2
F D 2 mL. cos   sin  / and N D mg 1 . sin  C  cos  / : (6)
2g
August 10, 2009
1128 Solutions Manual

We now proceed with Step (b) of the solution. We begin by defining to the the position of the stick at
release and the position of the stick at a generic angle  following . We observe that, as long as A does
not slip, friction does no work and the system can be treated as being conservative. Hence, we can apply the
work-energy principle as follows:
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (7)
where, recalling that the system is released from rest and observing that while point A does not slip the stick
is in a fixed axis rotation about A, we have
L L
T1 D 0; V1 D mg ; T2 D 12 IA P 2 ; and V2 D mg cos ; (8)
2 2
in which IA is the mass moment of inertia of the stick about A and is therefore given by
 2
2 L
1
IA D 12 mL C m D 13 mL2 ; (9)
2
where we have made use of the parallel axis theorem. Next, substituting Eq. (8) into Eq. (7) and solving for
P 2 , we have
3g
P 2 D .1 cos  /; (10)
L
where we have also used the expression for IA given in Eq. (9). Then, differentiating Eq. (10) with respect to
time and solving for R , we have
3g 3g
2P R D .sin  /P ) R D sin : (11)
2L 2L
We now proceed with Step (c) of the solution. Substituting the expressions for P 2 and R given in Eqs. (10)
and (11) into the expressions for F and N in Eqs. (6), after simplification gives

F D 34 mg sin .3 cos  2/ and N D 14 mg.1 3 cos  /2 : (12)

We now consider the impending slip condition, which is the limiting case for the working assumption used
thus far. In an impending slip condition we would have jF=N j D s , where s is the coefficient of static
friction between the stick and the ground. Using Eqs. (12) to enforce this condition gives

F 3 sin .3 cos  2/
D
N .1 3 cos  /2 D s : (13)

Let f ./ denote the function of  within absolute value signs, i.e.,
3 sin .3 cos  2/
f . / D : (14)
.1 3 cos  /2

We observe that f . / D 0 for  D 0. In addition, we observe that f . / ! 1 for  ! cos 1 .1=3/, i.e., as
the denominator .1 3 cos  /2 ! 0. This indicates that the maximum value of f . / is 1. However, this
also indicates that the stick would slip no matter how large s is. In other words, given a value of s , the
stick would start slipping before  would ever become equation to cos 1 .1=3/. In view of this observation,
we then ask whether or not F=N has a relative maximum, that is a local maximum that is achieved before
 D cos 1 .1=3/. To answer this question, we proceed as indicated in the problem statement, i.e., by solving
the equation df . /=d D 0. We begin by determining df . /=d, i.e.,

df ./ .3 cos2  2 cos  3 sin2  /.1 3 cos  /2 sin .3 cos  2/6.1 3 cos  / sin 
D3 ; (15)
d .1 3 cos  /4
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1129

which, recalling that sin C cos2  D 1, can be simplified to read

df . / 3.9 11 cos  /
D : (16)
d .1 3 cos  /3
Setting the above expression to zero gives

df ./ 3.9 11 cos  / 1


D0 ) D0 ) 9 11 cos  )  D cos .9=11/ D 35:10 : (17)
d .1 3 cos  /3
To understand the significance of the above result, we now compute the values of F , N and s corresponding
to the value  D 53:10 . Substituting the value  D 35:10 into Eqs. (12), we have

F  D35:10 D 0:1960mg and N D35:10 D 0:5289mg: (18)

In addition, substituting the value  D 35:10 into Eq. (13), we have

s jD35:10 D 0:3706: (19)

Because  D 35:10 is the value of  for which df . /=d is equal to zero, then such a value of  is
corresponds to a relative maximum for s . With this in mind, the result in the first of Eqs. (18) shows that,
for  D 35:10 , the friction force F is positive, i.e., points to the right. This means that if the given s were
indeed equal to that in Eq. (19), then the bar would start slipping at  D 35:10 and it would slip to the left
(i.e., point A would move to the left).
Now, what would happen if the given s is larger than that in Eq. (19)? To answer this question,
we first observe that the stick would slip for some value of  larger than 35:10 . Second we observe
that, for  > 35:10 , the value of jF=N j decreases (since  D 35:10 is a point of relative maximum
for jF=N j). In fact, referring to the first of Eqs. (12), we have that jF=N j D 0 for F D 0, i.e., for
 D cos 1 .2=3/ D 48:19 . Furthermore, for  > 48:19 we have that jF=N j increases again, but this time
F < 0. Hence, if s > 0:3706, the stick will eventually slip, but it will do so with A moving to the right.
In conclusion, we can the say that the maximum value of s for which the stick slips to the right is indeed
that in Eq. (19) so that the answer to our problem is as follows:

.s /max D 0:371 and slide D 35:1 :

August 10, 2009


1130 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.49

A stick of length L and mass m is in equilibrium while standing on its end A when
end B is gently nudged to the right, causing the stick to fall. Letting the coefficient
of static friction between the stick and the ground be s D 0:7 and modeling
the stick as a uniform slender bar, find the value of  at which end A of the stick
starts slipping and determine the corresponding direction of slip. As part of the
solution, plot the absolute value of the ratio between the friction and normal force
as a function of . To solve this problem, follow the steps below.

(a) Letting F and N be the friction and normal forces, respectively, between the
stick and the ground, draw the FBD of the stick as it falls. Then set the sum
of forces in the horizontal and vertical directions equal to the corresponding
components of mE aG . Express the components of aEG in terms of , , P and .
R
P and .
Finally, express F and N as functions of  , , R

(b) Use the work-energy principle to find an expression for P 2 . /. Differentiate


the expression for P 2 . / with respect to time, and find an expression for R . /.

(c) After substituting the expressions for P 2 . / and R . / into the expressions for
F and N , plot jF=N j as a function of . For impending slip, jF=N j must be
equal to s . Therefore, the desired value of  corresponds to the intersection
of the plot of jF=N j with the horizontal line intercepting the vertical axis at
the value 0.7. After determining the desired value of , the direction of slip
can be found by determining the sign of F evaluated at the  computed.

Solution

The FBD of the stick is shown on the right. Proceeding as indicated in


Step (a), summing forces in the horizontal and vertical directions, we have
X
Fx W F D maGx ; (1)
X
Fy W N mg D maGy ; (2)

where G is the center of mass of the stick, and where F and N are the
friction and normal forces at A, respectively. We will solve the problem
under the working assumption that the stick does not slip at A. Consistent
with this assumption, we then have that the position of G can be described as follows:

xG D 21 L sin  and yG D 12 L cos : (3)

Differentiating Eqs. (3) with respect to time, we have that the components of the velocity of G are

vGx D 21 LP cos  and vGy D 1 P


2 L sin : (4)

Differentiating Eqs. (4) with respect to time, we have that the components of the acceleration of G are

aGx D 21 L.R cos  P 2 sin  / and aGy D 1 R


2 L. sin  C P 2 cos  /: (5)

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1131

Substituting Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (1) and (2), and solving for F and N we have
 
L R
F D 21 mL.R cos  P 2 sin  / and N D mg 1 . sin  C P 2 cos  / : (6)
2g

We now proceed with Step (b) of the solution. We begin by defining to the the position of the stick at
release and the position of the stick at a generic angle  following . We observe that, as long as A does
not slip, friction does no work and the system can be treated as being conservative. Hence, we can apply the
work-energy principle as follows:
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (7)
where, recalling that the system is released from rest and observing that while point A does not slip the stick
is in a fixed axis rotation about A, we have
L L
T1 D 0; V1 D mg ; T2 D 12 IA P 2 ; and V2 D mg cos ; (8)
2 2
in which IA is the mass moment of inertia of the stick about A and is therefore given by
 2
2 L
IA D 1
12 mL Cm D 13 mL2 ; (9)
2

where we have made use of the parallel axis theorem. Next, substituting Eq. (8) into Eq. (7) and solving for
P 2 , we have
3g
P 2 D .1 cos  /; (10)
L
where we have also used the expression for IA given in Eq. (9). Then, differentiating Eq. (10) with respect to
time and solving for R , we have
3g 3g
2P R D .sin  /P ) R D sin : (11)
2L 2L

We now proceed with Step (c) of the solution. Substituting the expressions for P 2 and R given in Eqs. (10)
and (11) into the expressions for F and N in Eqs. (6), after simplification gives

F D 34 mg sin .3 cos  2/ and N D 14 mg.1 3 cos  /2 : (12)

We now consider the impending slip condition, which is the limiting case for the working assumption used
thus far. In an impending slip condition we would have jF=N j D s , where s is the coefficient of static
friction between the stick and the ground. Using Eqs. (12) to enforce this condition gives

F 3 sin .3 cos  2/
D
N .1 3 cos  /2 D s : (13)

In order to solve this equation for the value of  corresponding to the beginning of the slip motion we will
need to use some appropriate mathematical software and we will need to provide a guess for the solution,
that is, we will need to provide a value of  which is close to the solution of the above equation. We will
provide our guess by first plotting the expression for jF=N j, as we have done below:

August 10, 2009


1132 Solutions Manual

Impending Slip Condition vs.

0.6

!F"N!
0.4

0.2

0.0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

The above plot was obtained using following Mathematica code:


3 Sin"# $3 Cos"# $ 2%
&;
$1 $ 3 Cos"#%2
s # Abs!

Plot"s, ', 0, 60 Degree(, Frame % True,


FrameTicks % ''Automatic, None(, 'Automatic, None((, GridLines % Automatic,
AspectRatio % 1, FrameLabel % '"", ")F*N)"(,
PlotLabel % "Impending Slip Condition vs. "#

From the above plot, we see that the function jF=N j achieves the value s D 0:7, near  D 0:9 rad. Hence,
we will find the numerical solution to our problem by providing the value 0:9 as the initial guess for  . By
doing so, we obtain the following solution

slip D 0:9237 rad D 52:92 ; (14)

which was obtained using the following code


ImpendingSlipSolution ! FindRoot!s $ 0.7, ", 0.9#$

! " 0.923657"

Substituting the value of  given in Eq.(14) into Eq. (12), we have



F Dslip D 0:1144mg: (15)

This result indicates that F points to the left and therefore point A will slide to the right.
In conclusion, we have

slip D 52:9 and A slips to the right.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1133

Problem 8.50

Disks A and B have identical masses and mass moments of inertia about their respective mass centers.
Point C is both the geometric center and center of mass of disk A. Points O and D are the geometric
center and center of mass of disk B, respectively. If at the instant shown, the two disks are rotating about
their centers with the same angular velocity !0 , determine which of the following statements is true and
why? (a) hEC A < hEO B , (b) hEC A D hEO B , (c) hEC A > hEO B .
     

Solution
Answer. The answer to the problem is (a), i.e.,

j hEC j < j hEO


 
A B
j:

Explanation. Both bodies are in fixes axes rotations. For body A, we have

j hEC

A
j D IC j!E O j:

By contrast, for body B we have


2
j hEC

O
j D .ID C mB OD /j!E O j:
2
Since IC D ID , and since mB OD > 0, then the magnitude of the angular momentum of B about is center
is larger than the corresponding quantity for body C .

August 10, 2009


1134 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.51

Body B has mass m and mass moment of inertia IG , where G is the mass center of B. If B is trans-
lating as shown, determine which of the following statements is true and why: (a) hEE B < hEP B ,
 

(b) hEE D hEP , (c) hEE > hEP .


   
B B B B

Solution
Answer. The answer to the problem is (a), i.e.,

j hEE j < j hEP


 
B B
j:

Explanation. Because the body is translating and point E is on a line parallel to the velocity vector of the
center of mass we have that
hEE D 0: E

B
In addition, since P is not on a line parallel to the velocity vector of G and going through G, then we have

hEP E

B
0;

so that the magnitude of this vector must be greater than zero.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1135

Problem 8.52

The uniform thin pin-connected bars AB, BC, and CD have masses mAB D
2:3 kg, mBC D 3:2 kg, and mCD D 5:0 kg, respectively. Letting R D 0:75 m,
L D 1:2 m, and H D 1:55 m, and knowing that bar AB rotates at a constant
angular velocity !AB D 4 rad=s, compute the angular momentum of bar AB
about A, of bar BC about A, and bar CD about D at the instant shown.

Solution

Angular momentum of bar AB about A. Using the component system


shown, since AB is in a fixed axis rotation about A, using Eq. (8.46) on p. 628
of the textbook, we have
hEA AB D .IA /AB !EAB ;

(1)
O Hence, we have
where .IA /AB D 31 mAB R2 and !EAB D !AB k.

1
hEA D mAB R2 !AB kO D .1:72 kgm2 =s/ kO

AB
; (2)
3
where we have used the following numerical data mAB D 2:3 kg, R D 0:75 m, and !AB D 4 rad=s.

Angular momentum of bar BC about A. At the instant shown bars AB and CD are parallel to one
another. Therefore, we can conclude that the instantaneous center of rotation of bar BC is at infinity and
consequently bar BC has zero angular velocity (at the instant shown). Let F denote the center of mass of bar
BC . Because !EBC D 0, E then, using rigid body kinematics, we have vEF D vEB D !AB R {O. Then, applying
Eq. (8.42) on p. 627 of the textbook, we have
hEA BC D rEF =A  mBC vEF D 12 L {O C R |O  mBC . !AB R {O/:
 
(3)
Carrying out the cross products, we have

hEA D mBC !AB R2 kO D .7:20 kgm2 =s/ kO



BC
; (4)

where we have used the following numerical data: mBC D 3:2 kg, !AB D 4 rad=s, and R D 0:75 m.

Angular momentum of bar CD about D. Bar BC is in a fixed axis rotation about D. Hence, using
Eq. (8.46) on p. 628 of the textbook, we have
hED CD D .ID /CD !E CD ;

(5)
where .ID /CD D 13 mCD H 2 , is the mass moment of inertia of bar CD about D, and where, recalling that at
the instant shown vEB D vEC , which implies that !CD H D !AB R so that !CD D .R=H /!AB . In conclusion,
we have
hED CD D 13 mCD HR!AB kO D .7:75 kgm2 =s/ kO

; (6)

where we have used the following numerical data: mCD D 5:0 kg, H D 1:55 m, R D 0:75 m, and
!AB D 4 rad=s.
August 10, 2009
1136 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.53

The weights of the uniform thin pin-connected bars AB, BC, and CD are
WAB D 4 lb, WBC D 6:5 lb, and WCD D 10 lb, respectively. Letting  D 47 ,
R D 2 ft, L D 3:5 ft, and H D 4:5 ft, and knowing that bar AB rotates at a
constant angular velocity !AB D 4 rad=s, compute the magnitude of the linear
momentum of the system at the instant shown.

Solution

The linear momentum of the system is the sum of the liner momenta
of the individual components of the system. Hence, letting pE denote
the momentum of the system as a whole, we have

pE D mAB vEE C mBC vEF C mCD vEG


WAB WBC mCD
D vEE C vEF C vEG ; (1)
g g g
where, referring to the figure on the right, E, F , and G are the mass
centers of bars AB, BC , and CD, respectively.
Given the above expression, the solution of the problem is obtained after we derive expressions for the
velocities of points E, F , and G.
For the velocity of point E we can write

vEE D vEA C !EAB  rEE=A ; (2)

where
E
vEA D 0; rEE=A D 21 R |O; and O
!EAB D !AB k; (3)
so that we have
1
vEE D 2 !AB R {O: (4)
Next, observing that rEB=A D R |O, we must also have

vEB D vEA C !EAB  rEB=A D !AB R {O: (5)

Now, notice that we can compute the velocity of C in the following two ways:

vEC D vEB C !EBC  rEC =B and vEC D vED C !E CD  rEC =D ; (6)

where
O
!EBC D !BC k; rEC =B D L {O; E
vED D 0; O
!E CD D !CD k; rEC =D D H. cos  {O C sin  |O/: (7)

Substituting the result in Eq. (5) along with Eqs. (7) into Eqs. (6), carrying out the cross products, and
enforcing equality between the two expressions for vEC , we have

R!AB {O C L!BC |O D H !CD sin  {O H !CD cos  |O: (8)

Equation (8) is a vector equation corresponding to two scalar equations in the two unknowns !BC and !CD
whose solution is
R!AB cos  R!AB
!BC D and !CD D : (9)
L sin  H sin 
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1137

We now observe that rEF =B D 21 L {O and that rEG=D D 1


2 H. cos  {O C sin  |O/. Using these expressions,
we can then say
R!AB cos 
vEF D vEB C !EBC  rEF =B D R!AB {O |O; (10)
2 sin 
1 R!AB cos 
vEG D vED C !E CD  rEG=D D 2 R!AB {O |O; (11)
2 sin 

where we have used the expressions of vEB in Eq. (5), of vED in the third of Eqs. (7), as well as the expressions
in Eqs. (9). Substituting Eqs. (4), (10), and (11) into Eq. (1) and simplifying we have
 
R!AB cos 
pE D .WAB C 2WBC C WCD / {O .WBC C WCD / |O D . 3:354 {O 1:911 |O/ lbs; (12)
2g sin 

where we have used the following numerical data: R D 2 ft, !AB D 4 rad=s, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , WAB D 4 lb,
WBC D 6:5 lb, WCD D 10 lb, and  D 47 . Finally, computing the magnitude of the above expression, we
have

pE D 3:86 lbs:

August 10, 2009


1138 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.54

A uniform disk W of radius RW D 7 mm and mass mW D 0:15 kg is connected


to point O via the rotating arm OC . Disk W also rolls without slip over the
stationary cylinder S of radius RS D 15 mm. Assuming that !W D 25 rad=s,
determine the angular momentum of W about its own center of mass C as well
as about point O.

Solution

Recalling that in the component system shown kO D uO r  uO  , the angular


momentum of the the wheel W about its own mass center is

hEC / D IC !W kO D 12 mW RW
2 O
!W k; (1)

where IC D 21 mW RW 2
is the mass moment of inertia of the disk W about its
own mass center C . The expression in Eq. (1) can be evaluated to obatin

hEC 6
kgm2 =s/ kO

W
D .91:910 @; (2)

where we have used the following numerical data: mW D 0:15 kg, RW D 7 mm D 0:007000 m, and
!W D 25 rad=s.
To determine the angular momentum of the wheel W about O, observe that the wheel W rolls without
slip on S , with instantaneous center of rotation at Q. This implies that the velocity of the center of W is
vEC D !W RW uO  . Consequently, we have

hEO D IC !W kO C rEC =O  mW vEC



W
D IC !W kO C .RS C RW /uO r  .mW !W RW / uO 
D IC C mW .RS C RW /RW !W kO
h i
2
D 21 mW RW C mW .RS C RW /RW !W kO

D 1 mW RW 3RW C 2RS !W k; O

2 (3)

where we have used again the fact that IC D 21 mW RW


2
. The final expression in Eq. (3) can be evaluated to
obtain
hEO W D .66910 6 kgm2 =s/ kO

@;

where we have used the following numerical data: mW D 0:15 kg, RW D 7 mm D 0:007000 m, RS D
15 mm D 0:01500 m, and !W D 25 rad=s.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1139

Problem 8.55

An eccentric wheel B weighing 150 lb has its mass center G at a distance d D 4 in:
from the wheels center O. The wheel is in the horizontal plane and is spun from rest by
applying a constant torque M D 32 ftlb. Determine the wheels radius of gyration kG if
it takes 2 s to spin up the wheel to 140 rpm. Neglect all possible sources of friction.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the wheel is put
in motion and when it achieves the angular velocity of 140 rad=s, respectively.
Referring to the FBD on the right, we see that the only action contributing to a
moment about the fixed point O is the constant moment M . Therefore, observing
that M acts clockwise, we can apply the angular impulsemomentum principle
in the direction to obtain
Z t2
IO !B1 M dt D IO !B2 ) IO !B1 M.t2 t1 / D IO !B2 (1)
t1

where IO is the mass moment of inertia of the wheel about O, !EB D !B kO is the angular velocity of the
wheel, and where we have accounted for the fact that M is constant.
Based on the data provided, for the mass moments of inertia we have
WB 2 WB 2
IO D kG C d ; (2)
g g

where g is the acceleration due to gravity, WB is the weight of the wheel, kG is the radius of gyration of the
wheel about the wheels center of mass G, and d is the distance between G and the center of rotation O.
There are no forces on the FBD for which force laws are needed.
In this problem, both the initial and final angular velocities are given. Hence, observing that the wheel
will be rotating in clockwise, we can summarize the kinematics of the problem as follows:

!B1 D 0; !B2 D !final ; (3)

where !final D 140 rpm D 14:66 rad=s.


Letting t1 D 0 and t2 D tfinal , and substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into the last of Eqs. (1), we have
s
WB 2 WB 2 M gtfinal
M tfinal D kG !final d !final ) kG D d 2: (4)
g g WB !final

Recalling that M D 32 ftlb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , tfinal D 2 s, WB D 150 lb, !final D 140 rpm D 14:66 rad=s, and
d D 4 in: D 0:3333 ft, we have
kG D 0:909 ft:

August 10, 2009


1140 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.56

The uniform bar AB has length L D 4:5 ft and weight WAB D 14 lb. At the
instant shown,  D 67 and vA D 5:8 ft=s. Determine the magnitude of the
linear momentum of AB as well as the angular momentum of AB about its mass
center G at the instant shown.

Solution

The linear momentum of the bar is pEAB D mAB vEG where G is the mass
center of the bar, which is the midpoint of the bar. The magnitude of the
linear momentum of the bar is therefore

pEAB D mAB vG D WAB vG ;



(1)
g
where vG is the speed of the center of mass. Using the concept of
instantaneous center of rotation, and observing that the distance between
IC and G is L=2, we must have that vG D .L=2/j!AB j, where j!AB j is
the angular speed of the bar. Using again the concept of instantaneous
center of rotation, for point A we have
vA vA
vA D j!AB jL cos  ) j!AB j D ) vG D : (2)
L cos  2 cos 
Hence we have
pEAB D WAB vA D 3:23 lbs;

2g cos 

where we have used the following numerical data: WAB D 14 lb, vA D 5:8 ft=s, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , and
 D 67 .
The angular momentum of bar AB about G is given by

hEG D IG !EAB D IG !AB k;


O (3)

where !AB represents the component of the angular velocity of the bar in the direction, and where
1 1
IG D 12 mAB L2 D 12 .WAB =g/L2 . Since A is moving downward, the the bar is rotating counterclockwise,
so that, using the second of Eqs. (2), we have !A D vA =.L cos  / so that

WAB LvA O
hEG D k D .2:42 ftlbs/ kO ;
12g cos 

where we have used the following numerical data: WAB D 14 lb, L D 4:5 ft, vA D 5:8 ft=s, g D 32:2 ft=s2 ,
and  D 67 .
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1141

Problem 8.57

The top of the Space Needle in Seattle, Washington, hosts a revolving restaurant
that goes through one full revolution every 47 min under the action of a motor
with a power output of 1:5 hp. The portion of the restaurant that rotates is a ring-
shaped turntable with internal and external radii ri D 33:3 ft and ro D 47:3 ft,
respectively, and approximate weight W D 125 tons (1 ton D 2000 lb). Use
the given values of power output and angular speed to estimate the torque
M that the engine provides. Then, assuming that the motor can provide a
constant torque equal to M; neglecting all friction, and modeling the turntable
as a uniform body, determine the time ts that it takes to spin up the revolving
restaurant from rest to its working angular speed.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the system starts
spinning and when it achieves its working angular velocity, respectively. The
figure on the right is a top view of the FBD of the turntable. Choosing as our
moment center the fixed point O, which is the center of rotation of the system as
well as its center of mass, then the angular impulsemomentum principle gives
Z t2
IO ! t1 C M dt D IO ! t 2 ; (1)
t1

where IO is the systems mass moment of inertia about O and !E t D ! t kO is the angular velocity of the
turntable, and M is the moment applied by the motor.
Modeling the turntable as a uniform body of mass W =g (with W the weight of the turntable and g the
acceleration due to gravity) occupying a cicular crown of inner and ourter radii equal to ri and ro , respectively,
we have
IO D 12 .W =g/.ri2 C ro2 / D 12:63106 slugft2 ; (2)
where we have used the following numerical data: W D 125 ton D 250:0  103 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 ,
ri D 33:3 ft, and ro D 46:3 ft. Assuming that the torque provided by the motor is constant, letting P be the
power output of the motor at steady state, i.e., for t  ts , we must have
M D P =! t 2 : (3)
As far as the kinematic equations are concerned, observing that the system starts from rest and that we
are given the number of revolutions per minute of the turntable, we have
1 rev 2 rad=rev
! t1 D 0 and ! t 2 D D 0:002228 rad=s; (4)
47 min 60 s=min
Substituting Eq. (3) and the first of Eqs. (4) into Eq. (1), we have
.P =! t 2 /.t2 t1 / D IO ! t 2 ; (5)
where we have used the fact that P and ! t 2 are constant. Now, letting ts D t2 t1 and solving the above
equation for ts , we have
IO ! t22
ts D ) ts D 0:0760 s, (6)
P
where we have used the following numerical data: IO D 12:63  106 slugft2 (see Eq. (2)), ! t 2 D
0:002228 rad=s (see the last of Eqs. (4)), and P D 1:5 hp D 825:0 ftlb=s.
August 10, 2009
1142 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.58

Moving on a straight and horizontal stretch of road, the rear-wheel-drive car


shown can go from rest to 60 mph in t D 8 s. The car weighs 2570 lb (the
weight includes the wheels). Each wheel has diameter d D 24:3 in:, mass
moment of inertia relative to its own center of mass IG D 0:989 slugft2 , and
the center of mass of each wheel coincides with its geometric center. Determine
the average friction force Favg acting on the car during t . In addition, if the
wheels roll without slip, for each wheel, determine the average moment Mavg ,
computed relative to the wheels center, that is applied to the wheel during t.

Solution
Applying the impulse-momentum principle to the car in the x
direction, we have
Z t2
m.vE x /1 C Fx dt D m.vE x /2 ; (1)
t1

where m is the mass of the car, E is the center of mass of the


car, and Fx is the x component of the total external force acting
on the car. Since such a force consists of only the friction force,
then, denoting the average friction force by Favg and t2 t1 D t , we have
Z t2
Fx dt D Favg t: (2)
t1

Next, observe that the horizontal components of velocity in this problem are given. In particular, we have

.vE x /1 D 0 and .vE x /2 D vfinal ; (3)

where vfinal D 60 mph D 88:00 ft=s. Expressing the mass of the car as m D W =g, where W is the weight of
the car and g is the acceleration due to gravity, substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1), we have

W W vfinal
Favg t D vfinal ) FEavg D {O D .878 lb/ {O ,
g gt

where we have expressed the result in vector form and where we have used the following numerical data:
W D 2570 lb, vfinal D 88:00 ft=s, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , and t D 8 s.
Applying the angular impulsemomentum principle to a wheel in the direction,
and choosing the wheels center of mass G as moment center, we have
Z t2
.hG /1 C MG dt D .hG /2 ; (4)
t1

where hG is the component of the angular momentum of the wheel about


G and MG is the component of the resultant moment about G of all of the
forces and torques applied to the wheel.
By definition of average moment, we must have
Z t2
Mavg  t D MG dt; (5)
t1
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1143

where we have set t2 t1 D t .


Now, recall that the wheel starts from rest. In addition, recall that hG D IG !w , where IG is the wheels
mass moment of inertia about G and !E w D !w kO is the angular velocity of the wheel. Because the wheel
rolls without slip, we must have
vGx 2vfinal
!w D ) !w2 D ; (6)
d=2 d
where we have enforced the fact that the horizontal component of the velocity of G, namely vGx , is equal to
the horizontal velocity of the car as a whole. Summarizing, we have
2IG vfinal
.hG /1 D 0 and .hG /2 D : (7)
d
Substituting Eqs. (5) and (7) into Eq. (4), we have

2IG vfinal 2IG vfinal O


Mavg  t D ) E avg D
M k D . 10:7 lbft/ kO ,
d dt

where we have expressed the result in vector form, and where we have used the following numerical data:
IG D 0:989 slugft2 , vfinal D 88:00 ft=s, d D 24:3 in: D 2:025 ft, and t D 8 s.

August 10, 2009


1144 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.59

The rear-wheel-drive car can go from rest to 60 mph in t D 8 s. Assume that


the wheels are all identical and that their geometric centers coincide with their
mass centers. Let Mrear be the average moment applied to one of the rear wheels
during t and computed relative to the wheels center. Finally, let Mfront be the
average moment applied to one of the front wheels during t and computed
relative to the wheels center. Modeling the wheels as rigid bodies,
determine

which of the following statements is true and why. (a) Mrear < Mfront , (b)

Mrear D Mfront , (c) Mrear > Mfront .

Solution
The answer is (b). The reason for this is that, by the angular impulse-momentum principle the average
moment about the mass center of a wheel is dictated only by the mass moment of inertia and the change
angular velocity of the wheel. Since the motion and the rotational inertia of each wheel is the same, then the
average moment on each wheel must also be the same.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1145

Problem 8.60

The rear-wheel-drive car can go from rest to 60 mph in t D 8 s. Assume that


its wheels are identical, with their geometric centers coinciding with their mass
centers. Let Favg be the average friction force acting on the system during t
due to contact with the ground. Modeling the car and the wheels as rigid bodies,
does the value of Favg change whether or not we account for the rotational
inertia of the wheels? Why?

Solution
The answer is no. The reason for this is that the force of friction is dictated by the linear impulse-momentum
principle and in this principle the only inertia property that matters is the total mass of the car. The rotational
inertia of the wheels does not contribute to this principle.

August 10, 2009


1146 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.61

A rotor B with center of mass G, weight W D 3000 lb, and radius of gyration
kG D 15 ft is spinning with an angular speed !B D 1200 rpm when a braking
system is applied to it, providing a time-dependent torque M D M0 .1 C ct /,
with M0 D 3000 ftlb and c D 0:01 s 1 . If G is also the geometric center of
the rotor and is a fixed point, determine the time ts that it takes to bring the
rotor to a stop.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time at which the braking
moment is first applied (t1 D 0) and the stopping time, respectively.
Based on the FBD shown, choosing the fixed point G for the application
of the angular impulsemomentum principle in the direction gives
Z t2
IG !R1 M dt D IG !R2 ; (1)
0

where IG is the mass moment of inertia of the rotor about G and !E R D


!R kO is the angular velocity of the rotor.
We can express the mass moment of inertia of the rotor as
W 2
IG D k ; (2)
g G
where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Now recall that

M D M0 .1 C ct /: (3)

Next, we can summarize the kinematic equations for this problem as follows:

!R1 D !B and !R2 D 0: (4)

Then, substituting Eqs. (2)(4) into Eq. (1), we obtain


t2
W 2 W 2 M0
Z
t Dt
k !B M0 .1 C ct / dt D 0 ) k !B .1 C ct /2 02 s D 0
g G 0 g G 2c
2 2
2cW kG !B t Dt 2cW kG !B
) .1 C ct /2 02 s D 0 ) .1 C cts /2 C 1 D 0
M0 g M0 g
s !
2
1 2cW kG !B
) ts D 1C 1 ; (5)
c M0 g

which can be evaluated to obtain


ts D 331 s;

where we have used the following numerical data: c D 0:01 s 1 , W D 3000 lb, kG D 15 ft, !B D
1200 rpm D 125:7 rad=s, M0 D 3000 ftlb, and g D 32:2 ft=s2 .
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1147

Problem 8.62

A uniform pipe section A of radius r, mass center G, and mass m is gently


placed (i.e., with zero velocity) on a conveyor belt moving with a constant speed
v0 to the right. Friction between the belt and pipe causes the pipe to move to
the right and eventually to roll without slip. If k is the coefficient of kinetic
friction between the pipe and the conveyor belt, find an expression for tr , the
time it takes for A to start rolling without slip. Hint: Using the methods of
Chapter 7, we can show that the force between the pipe section and the belt is
constant.

Solution

Using the FBD shown, letting tr be the time at which the pipe section starts rolling
without slip, the angular impulse-momentum principle for the pipe section written about
the center of mass G gives
Z tr
IG !p1 C F dt D IG !p2 ; (1)
0

where !E D !p kO is the angular velocity of the pipe section, IG is the mass moment of inertia of the pipe
section about its center of mass G, and F is the friction force between the pipe section and the conveyor
belt. Since the pipe section is initially stationary, the pipe section will initially slip over the conveyor belt.
The friction force s therefore given by F D k N , Because the pipe section does not move in the vertical
direction, then the force N must balance the pipes section weight mg, i.e., N D mg. Consequently, we have

F D k mgr D constant; (2)

where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Substituting Eq. (2) into Eq. (1), and recalling that !p1 D 0 and
that IG D mr 2 , we have
r!2
k mgrtr D mr 2 !2 ) tr D : (3)
k g
To find !2 , we sum forces in the x direction to obtain

k mg D maGx ) aGx D k g ) vGx2 D k gtr ; (4)

where, to obtain the x component of the velocity of the center of mass at time tr , we have used the fact that
the acceleration of the center of mass is constant between the initial time and time tr . Finally, since at time tr
the pipe section achieves rolling without slip over a surface that moves with a horizontal velocity to the right
equal to v0 , we must also have that
v0 k gtr
vGx2 D v0 !2 r ) !2 D : (5)
r
Substituting this expression in the last of Eqs. (3) and solving for tr , yields

v0
tr D :
2k g

August 10, 2009


1148 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.63

A 14 lb bowling ball is thrown onto a lane with a backspin !0 D 9 rad=s and


forward velocity v0 D 18 mph. Point G is both the geometric center and the
mass center of the ball. After a few seconds, the ball starts rolling without slip.
Let r D 4:25 in: and let the radius of gyration of the ball be kG D 2:6 in. If
the coefficient of kinetic friction between the ball and the floor is k D 0:1,
determine the speed vf that the ball will achieve when it starts rolling without
slip. In addition, determine the time tr the ball takes to achieve vf : Hint: Using
the methods of Chapter 7, we can show that the force between the ball and the
floor is constant.

Solution

We will apply the both the linear and the angular impulsemomentum principles to solve this
problem. We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the ball is thrown
onto the lane and at which the ball starts rolling without slip, respectively. Referring to the
FBD on the right, applying the linear impulsemomentum principle in the x direction, we
have Z t2
m.vGx /1 F dt D m.vGx /2 ; (1)
t1

where m is the mass of the ball, G is the center of mass of the ball, vEG is the velocity of
the ball, and F is the total force acting in the horizontal direction, which, at this point is being treated as a
function of time.
Choosing the center of mass as moment center, applying the angular impulsemomentum principle in the
direction, we have Z t2
IG !b1 F r dt D IG !b2 ; (2)
t1

where IG is the mass moment of inertia of the ball about G, !b is the component of the balls angular velocity
in the direction, and r is the radius of the ball. Based on the given information, for m and IG we can write
W W 2
mD and IG D k ; (3)
g g G

where W is the balls weight, g is the acceleration due to gravity, and kG is the radius of gyration of the ball.
Following the hint of the problem, summing forces in the y direction and observing that the ball does not
move in the y direction, we have
X
Fy W N mg D 0 and N D mg; (4)

where N is the normal reaction between the ball and the lane.
Since the ball slides between t1 and t2 , for the force laws we have

F D k N D k mg; (5)

where we have accounted for the result in Eq. (4).


As far as the kinematic equations are concerned, observe that the horizontal component of the velocity of
the ball at time t1 is given, along with the initial angular velocity of the ball. In addition, we observe that at
time t2 the ball will still be moving in the positive x direction and so that .vGx /2 D vf . Finally, we observe
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1149

that when the ball starts rolling without slip, the horizontal component of velocity and the angular velocity are
no longer independent of one another, i.e., that we must have .vGx /2 D !b2 r. Hence, we can summarize
the kinematics of the problems as follows:
vf
.vGx /1 D v0 ; !b1 D !0 ; .vGx /2 D vf ; !b2 D : (6)
r
Observe that the result in Eq. (5) implies that F is a constant. Using this fact to carry out the integrals in
Eqs. (1) and (2), accounting for Eqs. (3) and (6), and letting t1 D 0 and t2 D tf , after simplification Eqs. (1)
and (2) become

v0 k gtf D vf ; (7)
2
2 kG vf
kG !0 rtf gk D : (8)
r
The above two equations form a system in the two unknowns vf and tf whose solution is

2 2
r.rv0 kG !0 / kG .v0 C !0 r/
vf D 2
D 18:3 ft=s and tf D 2
D 2:50 s;
kG C r2 k g.kG C r 2/

where we have used the following numerical data: r D 4:25 in: D 0:3542 ft, v0 D 18 mph D 26:40 ft=s,
kG D 2:6 in: D 0:2167 ft, !0 D 9 rad=s, k D 0:1, and g D 32:2 ft=s2 .

August 10, 2009


1150 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.64

The uniform disk A, of mass mA D 1:2 kg and radius rA D 0:25 m, is mounted


on a vertical shaft that can translate along the horizontal guide C . The uniform
disk B, of mass mB D 0:85 kg and radius rB D 0:38 m, is mounted on a fixed
vertical shaft. Both disks A and B can rotate about their own axes, namely,
`A and `B , respectively. Disk A is initially spun with !A D 1000 rpm and
then brought into contact with B, which is initially stationary. The contact is
maintained via a spring, and due to friction between A and B, disk B starts
spinning and eventually A and B will stop slipping relative to one another.
Neglecting any friction except at the contact between the two disks, determine
the angular velocities of A and B when slipping stops.

Solution

A top view of the FBDs of the two disks after they come in contact
is shown to the right. Points D and E are the centers of disks A and
B, respectively. Points D and E do not move once the disks are
in contact. Applying the angular impulse-momentum principle to
each disk by choosing D as moment center for A and E as moment
center for B, we have
Z t2
ID !A1 F rA dt D ID !A2 ; (1)
t1
Z t2
IE !B1 F rB dt D IE !B2 ; (2)
t1

where ID and IE are the mass moment of inertia of A and B, respectively, i.e.,

ID D 12 mA rA2 and IE D 12 mB rB2 : (3)

Since rA and rB are constant, and recalling that !B1 D 0, Eqs. (1) and (2) can be rewritten as
Z t2 Z t2
ID !A1 rA F dt D ID !A2 ; and rB F dt D IE !B2 ;
t1 t1
rA
) ID !A1 C IE !B2 D ID !A1 ; (4)
rB
Rt
where we have obtained the last equation by eliminating the term t12 F dt from the first two equations. The
last of Eqs. (4) and the fact that when rolling without slip is achieved we must have !A2 rA D !B2 rB , give
two equations in the two unknowns !A2 and !B2 whose solution is
mA mA rA
!A2 D !A1 and !B2 D !A1 ; (5)
mA C mB .mA C mB /rB
where we have also used the expressions for ID and IE in Eqs. (3). The results in Eqs. (5) can be evaluated
to obtain

!A end of slip D 61:3 rad=s and !B end of slip D 40:3 rad=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: mA D 1:2 kg, mB D 0:85 kg, !A1 D 1000 rpm D
104:7 rad=s, rA D 0:25 m, and rB D 0:38 m.
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1151

Problem 8.65

The uniform disk A, of mass mA D 1:2 kg and radius rA D 0:25 m, is mounted


on a vertical shaft that can translate along the horizontal arm E. The uniform
disk B, of mass mB D 0:85 kg and radius rB D 0:38 m, is mounted on a verti-
cal shaft that is rigidly attached to arm E. Disk A can rotate about axis `A , disk
B can rotate about axis `B , and the arm E, along with disk C , can rotate about
the fixed axis `C . Disk C has negligible mass and is rigidly attached to E so that
they rotate together. While keeping both B and C stationary, disk A is spun to
!A D 1200 rpm. Disk A is then brought in contact with disk C (contact is main-
tained via a spring), and B and C (and the arm E) are then allowed to freely ro-
tate. Due to friction between A and C , disks C (and arm E) and B start spinning.
Eventually A and C stop slipping relative to one another. Disk B always rotates
without slip over C . Let d D 0:27 m and w D 0:95 m. If the only elements of
the system that have mass are A and B, and if all friction in the system can be
neglected except for that between A and C and between C and B, determine
the angular speeds of A and C when they stop slipping relative to one another.

Solution
Note: The problem statement contains an error: the value of the quantity rB is incorrect. In this solution we
will use the following value: rB D 0:18 m.
We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the wheels
are first brought into contact (and the system starts spinning) and when slip
stops between the wheels. The figure above is a top view of the FBD of the
system. Because the system is freely rotating, choosing as our moment center
the fixed point O, we see that there are no external moments acting on the
system and therefore the total angular momentum of the system about O must
be conserved, i.e.,
hEO1 D hEO2 ; (1)
where hEO is the total angular momentum of the system about O.
We now proceed to compute the angular momentum of the system. We start with writing hEO . Recalling
that we are neglecting the mass of both disk C and the arm E, we have

hEO D .hEO /A C .hEO /B ; (2)

where,
.hEO /A D IQ !EA C rEQ=O  mA vEQ and .hEO /B D IP !EB C rEP =O  mB vEP ; (3)
where IQ is the mass moment of inertia of disk A about its mass center Q, and IP is the mass moment of
inertia of B about its mass center P :

IQ D 12 mA rA2 D 0:03750 kgm2 and IP D 21 mB rB2 D 0:01377 kgm2 ; (4)

where we have used the following numerical data: mA D 1:2 kg, rA D 0:025 m, mB D 0:85 kg, and
rB D 0:18 m. Going back to the solution of the problem, from Eqs. (3) we see that the key to the solution is
expressing all the velocity terms at times t1 and t2 .

August 10, 2009


1152 Solutions Manual

At time t1 B is at rest and A is spinning with vEQ1 D 0E (i.e., the arm E on which A is mounted is not
rotating). Therefore, referring to Eqs. (3), at time t1 we have

.hEO1 /A D IQ !A1 kO and .hEO1 /B D 0;


E (5)

where we have set !EA D !A1 k,O and where !A1 D 1200 rpm D 125:7 rad=s.
We now observe that points P and Q move with the arm E. Recalling that E forms a single rigid body
O
with disk C and that the center of rotation of such a body is the fixed point O, so that !E E D !E C D !C k,
using rigid body kinematics at time t2 we have
O
!EA2 D !A2 k; vEQ2 D !E C 2  rEQ=O D !C 2 kO  .rA C rC / uO r D !C 2 .rA C rC / uO  (6)
!EB2 D !B2 kO vEP 2 D !E C 2  rEP =O D !C 2 kO  .rB C rC / uO r D !C 2 .rB C rC / uO  ; (7)
where we have used the fact that
rEQ=O D .rA C rC / uO r and rEP =O D .rB C rC / uO r : (8)
Substituting Eqs. (6) into Eqs. (3), and using Eqs. (8), at time t2 we have

.hEO2 /A D IQ !A2 C mA .rA C rC /2 !C 2 kO and .hEO2 /B D IP !B2 C mB .rB C rC /2 !C 2 k;


O
   
(9)
Then, using Eqs. (2), (5), and (9), Eq. (1) can be rewritten as
IQ !A1 D IQ !A2 C IP !B2 C mA .rA C rC /2 C mB .rB C rC /2 !C 2 ;
 
(10)
where we have written only the component of the equation since it is the only nonzero component of the
corresponding vector equation.
Observe that Eq. (10) is a single scalar equation in the three unknowns !A2 , !B2 ,
and !C 2 . To find the two additional equations we need, We recall that at t2 the
disks A and B no longer slip relative to C . Referring to the figure on the right,
these two rolling without slip conditions imply vEH 2 D vEH 0 2 and vEF 2 D vEF 0 2 ,
where points H and H 0 belong to C and A, respectively, and points F and F 0
belong to C and B respectively.
Applying rigid body kinematics, at time t2 we have
vEH 2 D vEH 0 2 ) !E C 2  rEH=O D vEQ2 C !EA2  rEH 0 =Q ) !C 2 rC D .rA C rC /!C 2 rA !A2 ; (11)
vEF 2 D vEF 0 2 ) !E C 2  rEF =O D vEP 2 C !EB2  rEF 0 =P ) !C 2 rC D .rB C rC /!C 2 C rB !B2 ; (12)
where we have used Eqs. (6) and (7) and the fact that the only nonzero component of Eqs. (11) and (11) is the
 component.
We now observe that Eq. (10), (11), and (12) form a system of three equations in the three unknowns
!A2 , !B2 , and !C 2 , whose solution is
IQ !A1
!A2 D !B2 D !C 2 D : (13)
IP C IQ C mA .rA C rC /2 C mB .rB C rC /2
Therefore, the problems answer is

j!A jafter slip stops D j!B jafter slip stops D 18:7 rad=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: IQ D 0:03750 kgm2 (see Eqs. (4)), !A1 D 1200 rpm D
125:7 rad=s, IP D 0:01377 kgm2 (see Eqs. (4)), mA D 1:2 kg, rA D 0:025 m, rB D 0:18 m, and rC D
d rB D 0:09000 m (given that d D 0:27 m).
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1153

Problem 8.66

An 0:8 lb collar with center of mass at G and a uniform cylindrical horizontal


arm A of length L D 1 ft, radius ri D 0:022 ft, and weight WA D 1:5 lb are
rotating as shown with !0 D 1:5 rad=s while the collars mass center is at a
distance d D 0:44 ft from the axis. The vertical shaft has radius e D 0:03 ft
and negligible mass. After the cord restraining the collar is cut, the collar
slides with no friction relative to the arm. Assuming that no external forces and
moments are applied to the system, determine the collars impact speed with
the end of A if (a) the collar is modeled as a particle coinciding with its own
mass center (in this case neglect the collars dimensions), and (b) the collar is
modeled as a uniform hollow cylinder with length ` D 0:15 ft, inner radius ri ,
and outer radius ro D 0:048 ft.

Solution

Let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the collar
is released and when when point G is at a generic distance r from the
axis, respectively. The figure to the right is a top view of the FBD
of the system. The impact speed to be determined is the magnitude of
P We first
the radial velocity of G (the mass center of the collar), i.e., r.
determine P using the angular impulsemomentum principle. Then we
combine this result with the application of Newtons second law to the
P Observe that the external moment about the axis,
collar to obtain r.
identified by point O, is zero and therefore the angular momentum of
the system about the axis is conserved. Consequently, denoting the angular momentum of the system about
O by hEO D IO !A k, O we have
IO1 !A1 D IO2 !A2 ; (1)
O
where IO is the systems mass moment of inertia about O and !EA D !A k is the angular velocity of the
system (i.e., the common angular velocity of both the arm and the collar).
The quantity IO varies as the collar slides down the arm and it consists of a contribution fue to the arm
and a contribution do to the collar. The mass moment of inertia of just the arm A about O is
2
.IO /A D 121
mA .3ri2 C L2 / C mA 12 L C e D 0:01697 slugft2 ; (2)
where we have used the following numerical data: mA D .1:5 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:04658 slug, ri D 0:022 ft,
1
L D 1 ft, and e D 0:03 ft. Observe that the term 12 mA .3ri2 C L2 / is the mass moment of inertia of the arm
2
about its own mass center, the term mA 12 L C e is needed as per the parallel axis theorem and consist of


the mass of the arm times the square of the distance between the arms center of mass and the spin axis.
The mass moment of inertia of the collar about its own center of mass is
(
0; when the collar is modeled as a particle,
IG D mC 2 2 2 6
(3)
12 3.ri C ro / C ` / D 63:8910 slugft; when the collar is modeled as a rigid body,

where we have used the following numerical data: mC D .0:8 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:02484 slug, ri D 0:022 ft,
ro D 0:048 ft, and ` D 0:15 ft.
Hence, overall, using the above definitions along with the parallel axis theorem applied to the collar, the
total overall mass moment of inertia for the system about O is
IO D .IO /A C IG D I  C mC r 2 ; (4)
August 10, 2009
1154 Solutions Manual

where (
0:01697 slugft2 for the collar as a particle;
I  D .IO /A C IG D (5)
0:01703 slugft2 for the collar as a rigid body:
Going back to the statement of conservation of angular momentum, observing that !1 D !0 and letting
P and using the definition in Eq. (4), Eq. (1) gives
!2 D ,
I  C mC d 2
P D  !0 ; (6)
I C mC r 2
where we have set r1 D d .
Referring to the FBD on the right, we observe that no force acts on the
collar in the r direction so that
X
Fr D mC aGr W 0 D mC .rR r P 2 / ) rR D r P 2 : (7)

Recalling that rR D r.d


P r=dr/
P and using Eq. (6) we then have

.I  C mC d 2 /2 2
P rP D r
rd ! dr
.I  C mC r 2 /2 0
Z rP r
.I  C mC d 2 /2 2
Z
) P rP D
rd r ! dr: (8)
rP1 d .I  C mC r 2 /2 0
Recalling that rP1 D 0 and r1 D d , the above expression yields
r
1 2 .I  C mC d 2 /2 !02 1  2 2 2
D .I C mC d / !0 1 1 
2 P
r D : (9)
2mC .I  C mC r 2 / d 2mC I  C mC d 2 I  C mC r 2
Solving for rP and simplifying, we obtain
s
I  C mC d 2 2
rP D !0 .r d 2 /: (10)
I  C mC r 2

Answer to part (a). If the collar is modeled as a particle, then I  D 0:01697 slugft2 (see Eq. (5)) and the
impact with the end of the arm occurs for r D L C e D 1:030 ft (given that L D 1 ft and e D 0:03 ft). Using
these considerations and recalling that rP does represent the impact speed, Eq. (10) yields

Collar modeled as a particle: vimpact D 0:990 ft=s,

where we also have used the following numerical data: !0 D 1:5 rad=s, mC D .0:8 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D
0:02484 slug, and d D 0:44 ft.

Answer to part (b). If the collar is modeled as a rigid body, then I  D 0:01703 slugft2 (see Eq. (5)) and
the impact with the end of the arm occurs for r D L C e 21 ` D 0:9550 ft (given that L D 1 ft, e D 0:03 ft,
and ` D 0:15 ft). Using these considerations along with Eqs. (3)(4), and recalling that rP does represent the
impact speed, Eq. (10) yields

Collar modeled as a rigid body: vimpact D 0:943 ft=s,

where we have again used the following numerical data: !0 D 1:5 rad=s, mC D .0:8 lb/=.32:2 ft=s2 / D
0:02484 slug, and d D 0:44 ft.
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1155

Problem 8.67

A crate A with weight WA D 250 lb is hanging from a rope wound around a uniform
drum D of radius r D 1:2 ft, weight WD D 125 lb, and center C . The system is
initially at rest when the restraining system holding the drum stationary fails, thus
causing the drum to rotate, the rope to unwind, and, consequently, the crate to fall.
Assuming that the rope does not stretch or slip relative to the drum and neglecting
the inertia of the rope, determine the speed of the crate 1:5 s after the system starts to
move.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the
system is released and 1:5 s after release, respectively. Referring
to the FBDs on the right, we apply the linear impulsemomentum
principle to the crate along the vertical direction and the angular
impulsemomentum principle to the drum. Specifically, we have
Z t2
mA .vAy /1 C .Fc WA / dt D mA .vAy /2 ; (1)
t1

where mA is the mass of the crate, vEA D vAy |O is the velocity of the crate, Fc is the tension in the cord
assumed to be some general function of time, and WA is the weight of the crate. For the drum, choosing the
fixed point C as the moment center, we have
Z t2
.hC /1 C rFc dt D .hC /2 ; (2)
t1

where hEC D hC kO is the angular momentum of the drum about C , C coincides with the center of mass of
the drum, and r is the radius of the drum. Since C is the mass center of the drum, we can express the angular
momenta of the drum as follows:

.hC /1 D IC !D1 and .hC /2 D IC !D2 ; (3)

where !ED D !D kO is the angular velocity of the drum, and where IC is the mass moment of the drum
about C .
Based on the information provided in the problem statement, we can express the mass of the crate and the
mass moment of inertia of the drum as follows:
WA 1 WD 2
mA D and IC D r ; (4)
g 2 g
where g is the acceleration due to gravity and WD is the weight of the drum. Next, because the cord does not
slip relative to the drum, we observe that we must have vAy D !D r. Therefore, recalling that the system is
released from rest, we can summarize the kinematic equations for the problem as follows:

.vAy /2
.vAy /1 D 0; !D1 D 0; and !D2 D : (5)
r

August 10, 2009


1156 Solutions Manual

Letting t1 D 0 and t2 D 1:5 s, substituting the first of Eqs. (4) and the first of Eqs. (5) into Eq. (1), and
rearranging terms, we have Z t2
WA
Fc dt D WA t2 C .vAy /2 : (6)
0 g
Substituting the last of Eqs. (4) and the last two of Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (3), we obtain
1 WD
.hC /1 D 0 and .hC /2 D r.vAy /2 : (7)
2 g
Then substituting Eqs. (7) into Eq. (2), again letting t1 D 0 and t2 D 1:5 s, and simplifying, we have
Z t2
1 WD
Fc dt D .vAy /2 : (8)
0 2 g
Eliminating the integral from Eqs. (6) and (8) we have
1 WD WA
.vAy /2 D WA t2 C .vAy /2 ; (9)
2 g g

which is an equation in the single unknown .vAy /2 whose solution is

2gt2 WA
.vAy /2 D D 38:64 ft=s; (10)
WD C 2WA

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , t2 D 1:5 s, WA D 250 lb, and WD D
125 lb. Finally, taking the absolute value of the result here above and expressing the final answer to three
significant figures, we have

vA after 1:5 s D 38:6 ft=s:

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1157

Problem 8.68

Some pipe sections of radius r and mass m are being unloaded and placed in a
row against a wall. The first of these pipe sections, A, is made to roll without
slipping into a corner with an angular velocity !0 as shown. Upon touching
the wall, A does not rebound but slips against the ground and against the wall.
Modeling A as a uniform thin ring with center at G and letting g and w be
the coefficients of kinetic friction of the contacts between A and the ground and
between A and the wall, respectively, determine an expression for the angular
velocity of A as a function of time from the moment A touches the wall until
it stops. Hint: Using the methods learned in Chapter 7, we can show that the
friction forces at the ground and at the wall are constant.

Solution

Using the FBD shown we have


X
Fx W Fg Nw D mA aGx ; (1)
X
Fy W Ng C Fw mA g D mA aGy ; (2)

where Fg and Ng are the friction and normal forces between the
pipe and the ground, whereas Fw and Nw are the friction and normal
forces between the pipe and the wall. Since aGx D 0 and aGy D 0,
and since Fg D g Ng and Fw D w Nw , we can solve Eqs. (1)
and (2) for Fg and Fw to obtain
g g w
Fg D mA g and Fw D mA g: (3)
1 C g w 1 C g w

Next, writing the angular impulsemomentum principle for the pipe about G, we have
Z t
.hG /1 C .Fg C Fw /r dt D .hG /2 ; (4)
0

where
.hG /1 D IG !0 and .hG /2 D IG !.t /; (5)
where IG D mA r 2 and !.tE / D !.t / kO is the angular velocity of the pipe. Substituting Eqs. (3) and (5) into
Eq. (4), and using the expression for IG , we have

g .1 C w /mA gr
mA r 2 !0 C t D mA r 2 !.t /; (6)
1 C g w

which can be solved for !.t / to obtain


 
g .1 C w /g
E /D
!.t t !0 kO ;
.1 C g w /r

where we have expressed the final answer in vector form.

August 10, 2009


1158 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.69

A cord, which is wrapped around the inner radius of the spool of mass m D
35 kg, is pulled vertically at A by a constant force P D 120 N (the cord is
pulled in such a way that it remains vertical), causing the spool to roll over the
horizontal bar BD. The inner radius of the spool is R D 0:3 m, and the center
of mass of the spool is at G, which also coincides with the geometric center of
the spool. The spools radius of gyration is kG D 0:18 m. Assuming that the
spool starts from rest, that the cords inertia and extensibility can be neglected,
and that the spool rolls without slip, determine the speed of the spools center
3 s after the application of the force. In addition, determine the minimum static
friction coefficient for rolling without slip to be maintained during the time
interval in question.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the initial time at which the force is applied
(t1 D 0) and the instant 3 seconds after the force is applied begins (t2 D 3 s),
respectively. Based on the FBD shown, the application of the linear impulse
mometum principle in the x direction gives
Z t2
m.vGx /1 C F dt D m.vGx /2 ; (1)
0

where vEG D vGx {O is the velocity of the center of mass G of the spool, and
where the friction force F is being treated as a function of time.
The application of the angular impulsemomentum principle about G in the direction yields
Z t2
IG !S1 C .FR PR/ dt D IG !S 2 ; (2)
0

where IG is the mass moment of inertia of the spool about G and !E S D !S kO is the angular velocity of the
spool. We can express the mass moment of inertia of the spool as
2
IG D mkG : (3)

Recalling that starts from rest and that it rolls without slip, we can summarize the kinematic equations of
the problem as follows:
.vGx /2
.vGx /1 D 0; !S1 D 0; !S 2 D : (4)
R
Substituting the first of Eqs. (4) into Eq. (1), we have
Z t2
F dt D m.vGx /2 : (5)
0

Substituting Eq. (3) and the last two of Eqs. (4) into Eq. (2) and recalling that P is constant, we have
Z t2
2 .vGx /2
R F dt PRt2 D mkG : (6)
0 R

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1159

Substituting Eq. (5) into Eq. (6) and solving for .vGx /2 , we have

PR2 t2
.vGx /2 D 2
: (7)
m.R2 C kG /

Observing that the speed of the spool is vG D jvGx j, evaluating the result in Eq. (7), we have

vG tD3 s D 7:56 m=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: P D 120 N, R D 0:3 m, t2 D 3 s, m D 35 kg, and
kG D 0:18 m.
Since the spool does not move in the y direction, the equilibrium of the forces in the y direction implies
that N C P D mg, which implies that N D mg P . Letting s denote the coefficient of static friction
between the spool and the rail, for the spool to roll without slip, at the very minimum we must have
Fmin D .s /min .mg P /, which indicates that Fmin is a constant force. Substituting Fmin for F in Eq. (5)
and using the result in Eq. (7), we have
t2
PR2 t2 PR2 t2
Z
.s /min .mg P / dt D m 2
) .s /min .mg P /t2 D 2
; (8)
0 m.R2 C kG / R 2 C kG

which can be solved for s to obtain

PR2
.s /min D 2
; (9)
.mg P /.R2 C kG /

which can be evaluated to obtain


.s /min D 0:395;

where we have used the following numerical data: P D 120 N, R D 0:3 m, m D 35 kg, g D 9:81 m=s2 , and
kG D 0:18 m.

August 10, 2009


1160 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.70

A spool has weight W D 450 lb, outer and inner radii R D 6 ft and  D 4:5 ft,
respectively, center of mass G coinciding with its geometric center, and radius
of gyration kG D 4:0 ft. The spool is being pulled to the right as shown, and
the cable wrapped around the spool can be modeled as being inextensible and
of negligible mass. Assume that the spool rolls without slip relative to both the
cable and the ground. If the cable is pulled with a force P D 125 lb, determine
the speed of the center of spool after 2 s and the minimum value of the static
friction coefficient between the spool and the ground necessary to guarantee
rolling without slip.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the initial time (t1 D 0) and the instant
2 seconds after the motion begins (t2 D 2 s), respectively. Based on the
FBD shown, the application of the linear impulsemometum principle in
the x direction gives
Z t2
mS .vGx /1 C .P C F / dt D mS .vGx /2 ; (1)
0

where mS is the mass of the spool, vEG D vGx {O is the velocity of the center
of mass G of the spool, and where the friction force F is being treated
as a function of time. The application of the angular impulsemomentum
principle about G in the direction yields
Z t2
IG !S1 C .FR P/ dt D IG !S 2 ; (2)
0

where IG is the mass moment of inertia of the spool about G and !E S D !S kO is the angular velocity of the
spool.
Since P is constant and recalling that the system starts from rest so that .vGx /1 D 0, from Eq. (1) we
have Z t2
F dt D mS .vGx /2 P t2 : (3)
0
Recalling again that P is constant and that the spool starts from rest so that !S1 D 0, we see that Eq. (2) can
be rewritten as Z t2
R F dt Pt2 D IG !S 2 : (4)
0
Then, substituting Eq. (3) into Eq. (4), we have
 
W W 2
R .vGx /2 P t2 Pt2 D k !S 2 ; (5)
g g G
2 2
where we have set mS D W =g and IG D mS kG D .W =g/kG (g is the acceleration due to gravity).
The spool rolls without slip so that we must have !S 2 D .vGx /2 =R. Substituting this result in Eq. (5)
and solving for .vGx /2 , we have
gR.R C /
.vGx /2 D 2
P t2 ; (6)
W .R2 C kG /
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1161

Observing that the speed of the spool is vG D jvGx j, evaluating the result in Eq. (6), we have

vG t D2 s D 21:7 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , R D 6 ft,  D 4:5 ft, W D 450 lb,
kG D 4 ft, P D 125 lb, and t2 D 2 s.
Since the spool does not move in the y direction, the equilibrium of the forces in the y direction implies
that N D mS g D W . Letting s denote the coefficient of static friction between the spool and the ground,
for the spool to roll without slip, at the very minimum we must have Fmin D .s /min N D .s /min W , which
indicates that Fmin is a constant force. Substituting Fmin for F in Eq. (3) and using the result in Eq. (6), we
have
Z t2  
W gR.R C / R.R C /
.s /min W dt D 2
P t2 P t2 ) .s /min W t2 D 2
1 P t2 ; (7)
0 g W .R2 C kG / .R2 C kG /

which can be solved for s to obtain


2
P .R kG /
.s /min D 2
; (8)
W .R2 C kG /

which can be evaluated to obtain


.s /min D 0:0588;

where we have used the following numerical data: P D 125 lb, W D 450 lb, R D 6 ft,  D 4:5 ft, and
kG D 4 ft.

August 10, 2009


1162 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.71

The wind turbine in the figure consists of three equally spaced blades that are
rotating as shown about the fixed point O with an angular velocity !0 D 30 rpm.
Suppose that each 38;000 lb blade can be modeled as a narrow uniform rectangle
of length b D 182 ft, width a D 12 ft, and negligible thickness, with one of
its corners coinciding with the center of rotation O. The orientation of each
blade can be controlled by rotating the blade about an axis going through the
center O and coinciding with the blades leading edge. Neglecting aerodynamic
forces and any source of friction, and assuming that turbine is freely rotating,
determine the turbines angular velocity !f after each blade has been rotated
90 about its own leading edge.

Solution

We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time at which the blades are
oriented as shown and after being rotated 90 , respectively. Based on the
assumptions stated, the FBD of the turbine is as shown. Therefore, the
angular momentum of the turbine about the fixed point O, is conserved,
i.e.,
.hO /1 D .hO /2 ; (1)
where hO is the component of the angular momentum about O, and
where, due to the symmetry of the system, the angular momentum of
the rotor consists of the three equal contributions, one for every blade.
Therefore we have

.hO /1 D 3IO1 !r1 and .hO /2 D 3IO2 !r2 ; (2)

where !E r D !r kO is the angular velocity of the rotor, and where IO1 and IO2 are the mass moments of inertia
of each blade about O at times t1 and t2 , respectively. Using the parallel axis theorem, these mass moments
of inertia are given by
1
.Wb =g/.a2 C b 2 / C .Wb =g/ .a=2/ C .b=2/2 D 13:09106 slugft2 ;
 
IO1 D 12 (3)
2
IO2 D 1
12 .Wb =g/b C .Wb =g/.b=2/2 D 13:03106 slugft2 ; (4)

where Wb is the weight of each individual blade, g is the acceleration due to gravity, and where we have used
the following numerical data: Wb D 38;000 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , a D 12 ft, and b D 182 ft.
Substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1) and solving for !r2 , we have
IO1
!f D !0 ; (5)
IO2
where we have used the fact that !r1 D !0 and !r2 D !f . The above expression can be evaluated to obatin

!f D 3:16 rad=s D 30:1 rpm;

where we have used the following numerical data: IO1 D 13:09  106 slugft2 (see Eq. (3)), IO2 D
13:03106 slugft2 (see Eq. (4)), and !0 D 30 rpm D 3:142 rad=s.
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1163

Problem 8.72

A toy helicopter consists of a rotor A, a body B, and a small ballast C . The


axis of rotation of the rotor goes through G, which is the center of mass of the
body B and ballast C . While holding the body (and ballast) fixed, the rotor is
spun as shown with a given angular velocity !0 . If there is no friction between
the helicopters body and the rotors shaft, will the body of the helicopter start
spinning once the toy is released?

Solution
The answer is no. The reason for this is that without friction no force can be transmitted between the rotor
and the body of the airplane. Therefore, the state of motion of the airplane would have no cause to change
based on the fact that the rotor is spinning.

August 10, 2009


1164 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.73

A toy helicopter consists of a rotor A with diameter d D 10 in: and weight


Wr D 0:0910 3 oz, a thin body B of length ` D 12 in: and weight WB D
0:14410 3 oz, and a small ballast C placed at the front end of the body and
with weight WC D 0:072310 3 oz. The ballasts weight is such that the axis of
the rotation of the rotor goes through G, which is the center of mass of the body
B and ballast C . While holding the body (and ballast) fixed, the rotor is spun
as shown with !0 D 150 rpm. Neglecting aerodynamic effects, the weights of
the rotors shaft and the bodys tail, and assuming there is friction between the
helicopters body and the rotors shaft, determine the angular velocity of the
body once the toy is released and the angular velocity of the rotor decreases
to 120 rpm. Model the body as a uniform thin rod and the ballast as a particle.
Assume that the rotor and the body remain horizontal after release.

Solution

We are told that G is the mass center of the ballast-C -and-body-B


system. The center of mass of the rotor (point H ) is vertically
aligned with G. Therefore the overall weight of the toy mg, which
the only external force on the system contributed no moment about
G. Therefore the angular momentum of the helicopter about G
must be conserved. Since the vertical motion of the toy does not
play a role in this problem, we will treat G as a fixed point.
We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time at which the helicopter is first released and when the angular
speed of the rotor becomes 120 rpm, respectively. Hence, we have

hEG1 D hEG2 ; (1)

where hEG is the overall momentum of the system about G and is given by

hEG D .hEG /r C .hEG /C C .hEG /B ; (2)

where the three terms on the right-hand side of Eq. (1) are the angular momenta about G due to the rotor,
ballast C , and body B, respectively. We now proceed to determine these contributions to the angular
momentum one at a time.

Angular Momentum of the Rotor. Modeling the rotor as a uniform thin rod of length d with its mass
center vertically aligned with G, and recalling that the initial angular velocity of the rotor is !0 uO , we have

.hEG1 /r D .IG /r !0 uO and .hEG2 /r D .IG /r !r2 uO ; (3)

where .IG /r is the mass moment of inertia of the rotor about a vertical axis going through G, i.e., a vertical
axis going through the center of mass of the rotor itself so that
1 2 8
.IG /r D 12 .Wr =g/d D 1:01110 slugft2 ; (4)

where g is the acceleration due to gravity and .Wr =g/ is the mass of the rotor, and where we have used
the following numerical data: Wr D 0:09  10 3 oz D 5:625  10 6 lb d D 10 in: D 0:8333 ft, and
g D 32:2 ft=s2 .
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1165

Angular Momentum of the Ballast. Modeling the ballast C as a particle we have


.hEG /C D rEC =G  mC vEC ; (5)
where, referring to the FBD, rEC =G D b uO r , mC D WC =g is the mass of the ballast, and vEC is the velocity
of point C . Because the ballast moves with B, which, in turn, rotates about the , we have
vEC D !EB  rEC =G ; (6)
where !EB D !B uO is the angular velocity of the body. Substituting Eq. (6) into Eq. (5) and observing that
the vectors rEC =G and !EB are perpendicular to one another, we have
2
.hEG /C D mC rEC =G  !EB  rEC =G D .WC =g/rEC =G !EB D .WC =g/b 2 !B uO ;

(7)
where we have used the vector identity aE  cE  aE D jE aj2 cE when aE and cE are mutually perpendicular. To
determine b, recalling that G is the center of mass of the ballast-body system, we must have
mC rC C mB rE WC WB 1 WB `
rG D 0 D ) . b/C . ` b/ D 0 ) bD D 0:3329 ft;
mC C mB g g 2 2.WB C WC /
(8)
where we have used the following numerical data WB D 0:14410 3 oz D 9:00010 6 lb, ` D 12 in: D
1:000 ft, and WC D 0:072310 3 oz D 4:51910 6 lb. Since C starts from rest, using Eq. (7), we have
.hEG1 /C D 0E and .hEG2 /C D .WC =g/b 2 !B2 uO : (9)
Angular Momentum of the Body B. The body B is rotates about the (fixed) axis with angular velocity
!EB D !B uO . Therefore, recalling that B starts from rest, we have
.hEG1 /B D 0E and .hEG2 /B D .IG /B !B2 uO ; (10)
where .IG /B is the mass moment of inertia of the body about G. To obtain .IG /B we model the body as a
thin bar and, referring to the FBD, we apply the parallel axis theorem to obtain
2 2 2
.IG /B D 1
12 .WB =g/` C .WB =g/e D 1
12 .WB =g/` C .WB =g/.`=2/ b2 D 3:11010 8
slugft2 ; (11)
where we have used the following numerical data: WB D 0:14410 3 oz D 9:00010 6 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 ,
` D 12 in: D 1:000 ft, and b D 0:3329 ft (see last of Eqs. (8)).

Final Computation Substituting Eq. (2) into Eq. (1), we have


.hEG1 /r C .hEG1 /C C .hEG2 /B D .hEG2 /r C .hEG2 /C C .hEG2 /B : (12)
Then substituting Eqs. (3), (9), and (10) into Eq. (12), we have
.IG /r !0 D .IG /r !r2 C .WC =g/b 2 !B2 C .IG /B !B2 ; (13)
where we have written the equation in scalar form (all of the nonzero terms are the direction). Equation (13)
is a single scalar equation in the only unknown !B2 whose solution is
.IG /r .!0 !r2 /
!B2 D ; (14)
.WC =g/b 2 C .IG /B
which can be evaluated to obtain

!B !r D120 rpm D 0:680 rad=s D 6:50 rpm;

where we have used the following numerical data: .IG /r D 1:011  10 8 slugft2 (see Eq. (4)), !0 D
150 rpm D 15:71 rad=s, !r2 D 120 rpm D 12:57 rad=s, WC D 0:0723  10 3 oz D 4:519  10 6 lb,
g D 32:2 ft=s2 , b D 0:3329 ft (see the last of Eqs. (8)), and .IG /B D 3:11010 8 slugft2 (see Eq. (11)).
August 10, 2009
1166 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.74

A crane has a boom A of mass mA and length ` that can rotate in the horizontal plane about a fixed point
O. A trolley B of mass mB is mounted on one side of A such that the mass center of B is always at a
distance e from the longitudinal axis of A. The position of B is controlled via a cable and a system of
pulleys. Both A and B are initially at rest in the position shown, where d is the initial distance of B from
O measured along the longitudinal axis of A. The boom A is free to rotate about O and, for a short time
interval 0  t  tf , B moves with constant acceleration a0 without reaching the end of A. Letting IO be
the mass moment of inertia of A, modeling B as a particle, and accounting only for the inertia of A and B,
determine the direction of rotation of A and the angle  swept by A from t D 0 to t D tf . Neglect the
mass of the cable and of the pulleys.

Solution
Referring to the FBD below,

the stated assumptions imply that the boom and the trolley form an isolated system from the viewpoint of the
rotational motion about O in the r plane. Therefore the systems angular momentum about O is conserved,
i.e.,
.hO /1 D .hO /2 ; (1)
where the subscripts 1 and 2 correspond to the initial time and a generic time t such that 0 < t < tf ,
respectively, and where the direction is oriented by the unit vector kO D uO r  uO  . Since the system starts
from rest we have .hO /1 D 0. For .hO /2 we have

.hO /2 D 0 D IO !A C mB vBr e; (2)

where !EA D !A kO is the angular velocity of the boom, and where vBr D a0 t is the component of the velocity
of B that is parallel to the radial direction shown in the figure. Hence we must have
mB a0 e
!A D t; (3)
IO
Therefore we have that
The system rotates clockwise.

The angle  swept by the boom is obtained by integrating the angular velocity of the boom Eq. (3) with
respect to time from time t D 0 to t D tf . This yields

mB a0 e 2
 D t ; (clockwise):
2IO f

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1167

Problem 8.75

Cars A and B collide as shown. Neglecting the effect of friction, what would be the angular velocity of A
and B immediately after impact if A and B were to form a single rigid body as a result of the collision? In
solving the problem, let C and D be the mass centers of A and B, respectively, and use the following data:
the weight of A is WA D 3130 lb, the radius of gyration of A is kC D 34:5 in:, the speed of A right before
impact is vA D 12 mph, the weight of B is WB D 3520 lb, the radius of gyration of B is kD D 39:3 in:,
the speed of B right before impact is vB D 15 mph, d D 19 in:, and ` D 144 in: Finally, assume that
while A and B form a single rigid body right after impact, the mass center of the rigid body formed by A
and B coincides with the mass center of the A-B system right before impact.

Solution
We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants right before and right after impact, respectively.

Referring to the FBD above, we see that, as far as the motion in the xy plane is concerned, the system is
isolated. Therefore, both the linear and the angular momentum of the system are conserved.
The conservation of the systems linear momentum is expressed by the following two equations:

mA .vC x /1 C mB .vDx /1 D mA .vC x /2 C mB .vDx /2 ; (1)


mA .vCy /1 C mB .vDy /1 D mA .vCy /2 C mB .vDy /2 ; (2)

where mA and mB are the masses of A and B, respectively, and where vEA D vAx {O C vAy |O is the velocity of
A, whereas vEB D vBx {O C vBy |O is the velocity of B. Choosing point D, which is the origin of the chosen
coordinate system, as moment center, and recalling that A and B do not move significantly right after impact,
the conservation of the systems angular momentum is expressed as follows:

ID !EB1 C IC !EA1 C rEC =D  mA vEC1 D ID !EB2 C IC !EA2 C rEC =D  mA vEC 2 ; (3)

where ID and IC are the mass moments of inertia of A and B about their respective mass centers, !EA D !A kO
and !EB D !B kO are the angular velocities of A and B, respectively, and where rEC =D , given by

rEC =D D ` {O d |O D .12:00 ft/ {O .1:583 ft/ |O; (4)

is the position of C relative to D both right before and right after impact; notice that we have used the
following numerical data: d D 19 in: D 1:583 ft and ` D 144 in: D 12:00 ft.
August 10, 2009
1168 Solutions Manual

Based on the data provided, for the masses and the mass moments of inertia, we have
WA WA 2
mA D D 97:20 slug; IC D k D 803:5 slugft2 ; (5)
g g C
WB WB 2
mB D D 109:3 slug; ID D k D 1172 slugft2 ; (6)
g g D

where g D 32:2 ft=s2 is the acceleration due to gravity, WA D 3130 lb and kC D 34:5 in: D 2:875 ft
are the weight of A and the radius of gyration of A about C , respectively, and where WB D 3520 lb and
kD D 39:3 in: D 3:275 ft are the weight of B and the radius of gyration of B about D, respectively.
Observing that there are no forces on the FBD for which force laws are needed, we now proceed to
the kinematic analysis. We begin by observing that the velocities before right impact are given and can be
summarized as follows:

.vC x /1 D vA D 17:60 ft=s; .vCy /1 D 0; !A1 D 0; (7)


.vDx /1 D vB D 22:00 ft=s; .vDy /1 D 0; !B1 D 0; (8)

where we have used the following numerical data: vA D 12 mph D 17:60 ft=s and vB D 15 mph D
22:00 ft=s. Next, since A and B form a single rigid body after impact, we must have

!A2 D !B2 D !2 ; (9)

where !E 2 D !2 kO is the common value of the angular velocity of A and B after impact. The fact that A and
B form a single rigid body after impact (with the geometry described in the problem statement) also implies
that we must have

vEC 2 D vED2 C !E 2  rEC =D ) .vC x /2 D .vDx /2 C d!2 and .vCy /2 D .vDy /2 C `!2 ;
) .vC x /2 D .vDx /2 C .1:583 ft/!2 and .vCy /2 D .vDy /2 C .12:00 ft/!2 ; (10)

where rEC =D is given in Eq. (4).


Substituting the values of the mass properties (see Eq. (5) and (6)) and the preimpact velocities (see
Eqs. (7) and (8)) into Eqs. (1)(3), we have

693:9 lbs D .97:20 slug/.vC x /2 D .109:3 slug/.vDx /2 ; (11)


0 D .97:20 slug/.vCy /2 D .109:3 slug/.vDy /2 ; (12)
2 2
2708 ftlbs D .153:9 lbs /.vC x /2 C .1166 lbs /.vCy /2 C .1976 ftlbs/!2 ; (13)

where we have used Eq. (4) again, and where we considered only the component of Eq. (3) since it is
the only nonzero component of the conservation of angular momentum equation. Now we observe that the
last two of Eqs. (10) along with Eqs. (11)(13) form a system of 5 equations in the five unknowns .vC x /2 ,
.vCy /2 , .vDx /2 , .vDy /2 , and !2 whose solution is

.vC x /2 D 3:076 ft=s; .vCy /2 D 2:154 ft=s; (14)


.vDx /2 D 3:613 ft=s; .vDy /2 D 1:915 ft=s; and !2 D 0:3391 rad=s: (15)

Hence, expressing the angular velocity of the system right after impact in vector form and to three significant
digits, we have

!E right after impact D . 0:339 rad=s/ kO :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1169

Problem 8.76

Some pipe sections are gently nudged from rest down an incline and roll without
slipping all the way to a step of height b. Assume that each pipe section does
not slide or rebound against the step, so that the pipes move as if hinged at the
corner of the step. Modeling a pipe as a uniform thin ring of mass m and radius
r, and letting d be the height from which the pipes are released, determine the
minimum value of d so that the pipes can roll over the step. Hint: When a
pipe hits the corner of the step, its motion changes almost instantaneously from
rolling without slip on the ground to a fixed axis rotation about the corner of the
step. Model this transition, using the ideas presented in Section 5.2 on p. 356.
That is, assume that there is an infinitesimal time interval right after the impact
between a pipe and the corner of the step, in which the pipe does not change its
position significantly, the pipe loses contact with the ground, and its weight is
negligible relative to the contact forces between the pipe and the step.

Solution
Referring to the figure below (left), let denote the position at release, when the pipe reaches the bottom
of the incline, when the incline impacts against point D of the step, and when the pipe reaches the top
of the step.

Referring to the FBD above (right), because of rolling without slip the friction forces F does not do any work
so that energy is conserved between and , i.e.,

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where T1 D 0 because the pipe is released from rest. Because of rolling without slip, denoting by Q the point
of contact of the pipe with the flor at ,T2 can be written as

T2 D 21 IQ !p2 ; (2)

where !Ep D !p kO is the angular velocity of the pipe, and where, modeling the pipe as a thin ring, IQ D 2mr 2
is the mass moment of inertia of the pipe relative to Q. Choosing the datum at a distance r from the ground,
we have V1 D mgd and V2 D 0. Hence, using these considerations along with Eq. (1) gives
p
2 2 gd
mgd D mr !p ) !p D ; (3)
r
where we have used the fact that at the pipe rotates clockwise. Between and the pipe will continue
rolling without slip and thefore move with a constant angular velocity.

August 10, 2009


1170 Solutions Manual

At time t3 we have the collision of the pipe against point D. From the impact-
relevant FBD (i.e., neglecting any force that is not impulsive) is shown below.
From this FBD we see that the impulsive forces acting on the pipe only act at point
D. Since D is a fixed point, then we must have
C
hD D hD : (4)

where the superscripts and C denote the instants right before and right after impact. By assumption, right
after impact the pipe is in a fixed axis rotation about D. Hence, Eq. (4) yields
C
IG !p3 m.r b/vGx3 D ID !p3 ; (5)

where IG D mr 2 , ID D 2mr 2 , !p3 D !2 , and vGx3 D !p3 . Hence, Eq. (5) can be rewritten as
p p
gd C gd
2
b/ gd D 2mr 2 !p3 !3C
p
mr m.r ) D .2r b/: (6)
r 2r 2

Finally, using work energy to study the motion from right after impact to when the
pipe barely makes it to the top of the step, we have

T3C C V3C D T4 C V4 ; (7)

where, since after impact the pipe is in a fixed axis rotation about D, we have

T3C D 12 ID .!PC3 /2 ; V3C D 0; T4 D 0; V4 D mgb: (8)

Substituting the expressions in Eq. (8) into Eq. (7) and solving for d , we have

4r 2 d
dD :
.2r b/2

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1171

Problem 8.77

Following up on parts (b) and (c) of the Pioneer 3 despin in Prob. 7.65, it turns
out that it is possible to analytically determine the length of the unwound wire
needed to achieve any value of !s by making use of conservation of energy and
conservation of angular momentum. In doing so, let the masses of A and B
each be m, and the mass moment of inertia of the spacecraft body be IO . Let
the initial conditions of the system be !s .0/ D !0 , `.0/ D 0, and `.0/P D 0,
and neglect gravity and the mass of each wire.

(a) Find the velocity of each of the masses A and B as a function of the wire
length `.t / and the angular velocity of the spacecraft body !s .t / (and the
radius of the spacecraft R). Hint: This part of the problem involves just
kinematics refer to Prob. 6.117 if you need help with the kinematics.

(b) Apply the work-energy principle to the spacecraft system between the time
just before the masses start to unwind and any arbitrary later time. You
P !s , and constants. Hint: No
should obtain an expression relating `, `,
external work is done on the system.

(c) Since no external forces act on the system, its total angular momentum must
be conserved about point O. Relate the angular momentum for this system
between the time just before the masses start unwinding and any arbitrary
P
later time. As with part (b), you should obtain an expression relating `, `,
!s , and constants.

(d) Solve the energy and angular momentum equations obtained in parts (b)
and (c), respectively, for `P and !s . Now, letting !s D 0, show that the
length of the unwound wire whenpthe angular velocity of the spacecraft
body is zero is given by `!s D0 D .IO C 2mR2 /=.2m/.

(e) From your solutions for `P and !s in part (d), find the equations for `.t / and
!s .t/. These are the general solutions to the nonlinear equations of motion
found in Prob. 7.64.

Solution

Part (a). We attach a rotating xy reference frame such that the x axis is always
aligned with the wire attached to A and such that the origin of the frame always
coincides with the point on the wire that is about to unwind (see point Q in the figure
on the right). Then, treating O as a fixed point, and using concepts from rotating
reference frames, we have

E  rEA=Q ;
vEA D vEQ C vEArel C (1)

where, observing that the unwind angle  is related to the unwound cord length ` via
the relation  D `=R,
vEQ D R.!s C P / {O D .R!s C `/
P {O; (2)

August 10, 2009


1172 Solutions Manual

E is the (absolute)
and where, recalling that vEArel is the velocity of A as perceived in the rotating frame and
angular velocity of the rotating frame, we also have that

`P O
 
P E
vEArel D ` {O; D .!s C  / k D P O !s C k; rEA=Q D ` {O: (3)
R
Then, substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and simplifying, we have

`P
 
vEA D R!s {O C ` !s C |O; (4)
R

Part (b). We define to be the position of the system right before the masses start to unwind; and is the
position corresponding to the cords having unwound an amount `.
The FBD shown on the right indicates that there are no external forces act on
the system, i.e., the system is isolated. Consequently, no work is being done on the
satellite. In addition, we assume the cords are inextensible and that any source if
internal friction is negligible. This then implies that that no internal work is done on
the system. Based on these assumptions, the work-energy principle requires the kinetic
energy of the system be conserved, i.e.,

T1 D T2 ; (5)

where, recalling that the A and B move with identical speeds, and denoting by IO the
mass moment of inertia of the satellite, which is assumed not to change appreciably as
the cords unwind, we have
2 2 2 2
T1 D 2 12 mvA1
 1
and T2 D 2 12 mvA2
 1
C 2 IO !s1 C 2 IO !s2 : (6)
P D 0, using the expression for the velocity of A in Eq. (4),
Recalling that !s .0/ D !0 , `.0/ D 0, and `.0/
we have
`P 2
 
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
vA1 D !0 R ; !s1 D !0 ; vA2 D vEA  vEA D R !s C ` !s C ; and !s2 D !s2 : (7)
R
Then, substituting Eqs. (6) and (7) into Eq. (5) and simplifying, we obtain the following equation:

`P 2
   
2
 2 2 2 2
1
2 IO C 2mR !0 D m R !s C ` !s C C 21 IO !s2 : (8)
R

Part (c). We define the time instants 1 and 2 to be the instants in time corresponding to the positions 1 and
2, respectively, defined for the application of the work-energy principle in Part (b).
As remarked earlier, there are no external forces acting on the system. Therefore the angular momentum
of the system must be conserved. Therefore, choosing the fixed point O as our moment center, we have

hEO1 D hEO2 (9)

where hEO is the angular momentum of the system about O and it is given by the sum of two contributions,
one due to the body of the satellite and the other due to A and B. Specifically, observing that A and B
contribute to the angular momentum in question in identical ways, we have

hEO1 D IO !E s1 C 2.ErA=O /1  mE
vA1 and hEO2 D IO !E s2 C 2.ErA=O /2  mE
vA1 ; (10)
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1173

P
where, recalling that !s .0/ D !0 , `.0/ D 0, and `.0/ D 0, using the expression for the velocity of A in
Eq. (4)

!E s1 D O
!0 k; .ErA=O /1 D R |O; vEA1 D R!0 {O; (11)
`P
 
!E s2 D O
!s k; .ErA=O /2 D ` {O C R |O; vEA2 D vEA D R!s {O C ` !s C |O: (12)
R

Substituting Eqs. (11) and (12) into Eqs. (10), and then substituting the result in Eq. (9) and simplifying, we
obtain
`2 P
IO C 2mR2 !0 D IO C 2m.`2 C R2 / !s C 2m `;
  
(13)
R
where we have written only the component of the conservation of angular momentum equation because this
component is the only nonzero component of the corresponding vector equation.

Part (d). Equation (8) and (13) form a system of two equations in the two unknowns `P and !s whose
solution is
IO C 2m.R2 `2 /
`P D R!0 and !s D !0 : (14)
IO C 2m.R2 C `2 /

From the second of Eqs. (14), we see that for !s to be equal to zero it is sufficient to set the numerator of the
expression for !s be equal to zero. Doing so and solving for `, we have

r
IO
`!s D0 D C R2 ; (15)
2m

as expected.

Part (e). The solution for `P Eq. (14) shows that `P is a constant. Hence, integrating `P with respect to time
and recalling that `.0/ D 0, we have
`.t / D R!0 t: (16)

Substituting this result in the second of Eq. (14) we obtain

IO C 2mR2 .1 !02 t 2 /
!s .t / D !0 : (17)
IO C 2mR2 .1 C !02 t 2 /

August 10, 2009


1174 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.78

A stop shot is a pool shot in which the cue ball (white) stops upon striking the
object ball (red). Modeling the collision between the two balls as a perfectly
elastic collision of two rigid bodies with frictionless contact, determine which
condition must be true for the preimpact angular velocity of the cue ball in order
to properly execute a stop shot: (a) !0 < 0; (b) !0 D 0; (c) !0 > 0.

Solution
To execute a stop shot under the stated assumptions, the cue ball must not have any angular velocity when
it hits the object ball. The reason is that the collision in question is a direct central impact with frictionless
contact. This implies that the angular velocity of the cue ball (as well as that of the object ball) is conserved
through the impact. Hence, if the angular velocity of the cue ball were not equal to zero, the ball would
continue rolling after the impact.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1175

Problem 8.79

The cue ball (white) is rolling without slip to the left, and its center is moving
with a speed v0 D 6 ft while the object ball (red) is stationary. The diameter d
of the two balls is the same and is equal to 2:25 in: The coefficient of restitution
of the impact is e D 0:98. Let Wc D 6 oz and Wo D 5:5 oz be the weights of
the cue ball and object ball, respectively. Let P and Q be the points on the cue
ball and on the object ball, respectively, that are in contact with the table at the
time of impact. Assuming that the contact between the two balls is frictionless
and modeling the balls as uniform spheres, determine the postimpact velocities
of P and Q.

Solution

We model the impact as an unconstrainted direct central impact. Point


O is the fixed point in space that happens to coincide with the points on
the two balls that come into contact at the time of impact. The chosen x
axis is aligned with the LOI. Points A and B are both the geometric and
mass centers of the cue and object balls, respectively. We will denote
the angular velocities of the cue and object balls as !E c D !c kO and
!E o D !o k,O respectively. We will first determine the postimpact angular
velocities of the balls and the postimpact velocities of the balls centers
and then we will use rigid body kinematics to determine the velocities
of points P and Q.
The impact in question is governed by the following equations:
C C
mc vAx C mo vBx D mc vAx C mo vBx ; (1)
C
!c D !c ; (2)
C
!o D !o ; (3)
C C
vAx vBx D e.vBx vAx /; (4)

which, in order, represent the conservation of linear momentum for the system along the LOI, the conservation
of the angular momentum of the cue ball about O, the conservation of the angular momentum of the object
ball about O, and the coefficient of restitution equation. The simplicity of these equations is due to the
particular nature of the impact in this problem (see discussion beginning on p. 649 of the textbook).
The preimpact conditions are given and can be summarized as follows:
2v0
vAx D v0 ; vBx D 0; !c D ; !o D 0; (5)
d
where the third of Eqs. (5) expresses the fact that the cue ball is rolling without slip before impact. Substituting
the last two of Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (2) and (3) we obtain the postimpact angular velocities of the balls.
Substituting the first two of Eqs. (5) into Eqs. (1) and (4) we obtain a system of two equations in the two
C C
unknowns vAx and vBx . Solving this system of equations and including the results from Eqs. (2) and (3), we
can summarize the postimpact kinematics of the balls as follows:

C .eWo Wc /v0 C .1 C e/Wc v0


vAx D D 0:3178 ft=s; vBx D D 6:198 ft=s (6)
Wc C Wo Wc C Wo
2v0
!cC D D 64:00 rad=s; !oC D 0; (7)
d
August 10, 2009
1176 Solutions Manual

where we have set mc D Wc =g and mo D Wo =g (g D 32:2 ft=s2 is the acceleration due to gravity), and where
we have used the following numerical data: e D 0:98, Wo D 5:5 oz D 0:3438 lb, Wc D 6 oz D 0:3750 lb,
v0 D 6 ft=s, and d D 2:25 in: D 0:1875 ft.
We are now in a position to determine the velocities of points P and Q. For point P we have

vEPC D vEAC C !E cC  rEP =A : (8)

Observing that we have rEP =A D .d=2/ |O and that A moves only in the x direction, we have

vEPC D vAx
C
{O C !cC kO  1 C
C 12 !cC d {O D .5:682 ft=s/ {O;

2d |O D vAx (9)

where we have used the results in the first of Eqs. (6) and (7), and where we have used the fact that
d D 2:25 in: D 0:1875 ft.
In the case of point Q, we observe that because !oC D 0 (see the second of Eqs. (7)), then the object
C C C C C
ball is translating so that vEQ D vEB , where vEB D vBx {O and where vBx is given by the second of Eqs. (6). In
conclusion, we have

vEPC D .5:68 ft=s/ {O and C


vEQ D . 6:20 ft=s/ {O :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1177

Problem 8.80

Consider the impact-relevant FBD of a car involved in a collision. Assume


that, at the time of impact, the car was stationary. In addition, assume that
the impulsive force F , with line of action `, is the only impulsive force acting
on the car at the time of impact. The point P at the intersection of ` and the
line perpendicular to ` and passing through G, the center of mass of the car, is
sometimes referred to as the center of percussion (for an alternative definition
of center of percussion see the Mini-Example on p. 552). Is it true that, at the
time of impact, the instantaneous center of rotation of the car lies on the same
line as P and G?

Solution
Yes, it is true that the instantaneous center of rotation will lie on the line connecting points P and G. The
reason for this is that, by the linear impulse momentum principle the post impact velocity of the center of
mass will have to be parallel to the force F . In turn, using the concept of instantaneous center of rotation,
this means that the instantaneous center of rotation will have to lie on a line per perpendicular to the velocity
of G and going through G. But this line is the line that also contains the point P .

August 10, 2009


1178 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.81

A basketball with mass m D 0:6 kg is rolling without slipping as shown when


it hits a small step with ` D 7 cm. Letting the balls diameter be r D 12:0 cm,
modeling the ball as a thin spherical shell (the mass moment of inertia of a
spherical shell about its mass center is 23 mr 2 ), and assuming that the ball does
not rebound off the step or slip relative to it, determine v0 such that the ball
barely makes it over the step.

Solution
The solution is organized in two parts. In the first, we consider the collision between the ball and the step. In
the second, we apply the work energy principle to relate the postimpact speed of the ball to the balls change
in elevation in going over the step.
The impact-relevant FBD of the ball is shown on the right. This FBD indicates
that the impact is a constrained impact in which the ball behaves as if hinged
at the fixed point O right after impact. Since point O is fixed, we can conclude
that the impact is governed by the conservation of angular momentum about O.
Keeping in mind that the vertical component of the velocity of G is equal to zero
before impact, we have

IG !b mb .r `/vGx D IO !bC ; (1)

where !E b D !b kO is the angular velocity of the ball, and where IG and IO are the mass moments of inertia
of the ball relative to points G and O, respectively. Specifically, we have

IG D 23 mb r 2 and IO D IG C mb r 2 D 53 mb r 2 : (2)

Since G is moving with speed v0 to the right and the ball rolls without slip before impact, we must have

vGx D v0 and !b D v0 =r: (3)

Hence, substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and solving for !bC , we have

5r 3`
!bC D v0 : (4)
5r 2

We now consider the second part of the problem. We define to coincide with
the postimpact position of the system, and we define to be the position of
the ball after it barely makes it to the top of the step. The FBD for this part of
the problem is shown on the right. Since the the ball moves as if hinged at O,
the only force doing work is gravity and therefore we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (5)
where, given our choice of datum, that the ball is in a state of fixed axis rotation about O after impact, and
that the ball barely makes it to the top of the step, we have
2
T1 D 12 IO !b1 D 56 mb r 2 .!bC /2 ; V1 D 0; T2 D 0; V2 D mb g`: (6)

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1179

Recalling that !bC is given in Eq. (4), substituting Eqs. (6) into Eq. (5), and solving for v0 we have
s
30g`r 2
v0 D ;
.5r 3`/2

which can be evaluated to obtain


v0 D 1:40 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 9:81 m=s2 , ` D 7 cm D 0:07000 m, and r D
12 cm D 0:1200 m.

August 10, 2009


1180 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.82

A bullet B of mass mb is fired with a speed v0 as shown against a uniform thin rod
A of length `, mass mr , and that is pinned at O. Determine the distance d such
that no horizontal reaction is felt at the pin when the bullet strikes the rod.

Solution

Under the assumption that no horizontal reaction is felt at the pint during the impact,
the impact-relevant FBD of the bar is as shown on the right. Using this FBD and
applying the linear impulsemomentum principle in the horizontal direction, we have
Z tC Z tC
C C
mvGx C N dt D mvGx ) N dt D mvGx ; (1)
t t

where G is the center of mass of the bar, vEG D vGx {O C vGy |O is the velocity of G,
N is the force exerted by the bullet on the bar during the collision, t and t C are the
time instants immediately before and after the collision, respectively, and where we have accounted for the
fact that the bar starts from rest and therefore vGx D 0. Choosing the fixed point O as moment center, and
applying the angularimpulse momentum principle, we have
Z tC Z tC
IO !A C Nd dt D IO !AC ; ) d N dt D IO !AC ; (2)
t t

where !EA D !A kO is the angular velocity of the bar, !A D 0 since the bar starts from rest, and where IO is
the mass moment of inertia of the bar about O and is therefore given by
2
IO D 1
12 m` C m.`=2/2 D 13 m`2 : (3)

Substituting the last of Eqs. (1) into the last of Eqs. (2), and using the expression for IO in Eq. (3), we have
C
d mvGx D 13 m`2 !AC : (4)

Now, observe that rigid body kinematics requires that vEG D vEO C !EA  rEG=O . Hence, accounting for the
fact that O is a fixed point, we must have
C
D !AC kO  `=2 |O ) vEG C
D 21 `!AC {O ) vGx C
D 12 `!AC :

vEG (5)

Substituting the last of Eq. (5) into Eq. (4), we have

d m 12 `!AC D 31 m`2 !AC : (6)

Solving the above equation for d , we have

d D 32 `:

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1181

Problem 8.83

Solve the problem in the Mini-Example on p. 552 using momentum methods


and the concept of impulsive force. Specifically, consider a ball hitting a bat
at a distance d from the handle when the batter has choked up a distance .
Find the sweet spot P (more properly called the center of percussion) of the
bat B by determining the distance d at which the ball should be hit so that the
lateral force (i.e., perpendicular to the bat) at O is zero. Assume that the bat is
pinned at O, it has mass m, the mass center is at G, and the mass moment of
inertia is IG .

Solution

The impact-relevant FBD of the bat assuming no impulsive forces


at the grip is shown on the right, where R is the impulsive force
exerted by the ball on the bat. Letting t and t C denote the time
instants right before and right after impact, respectively, the linear
impulsemomentum principle in the y direction, yields
Z tC
C
mvGy C R dt D mvGy ; (1)
t
where vGy is the y component of the velocity of G. If the bat rotates about the fixed point O, then rigid body
kinematics requires that
C
vGy D !b .` d / and vGy D !bC .` d /; (2)
where !E b D !b kO is the angular velocity of the bat. Substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1) we write
Z tC
R dt D m.` d /.!bC !b /: (3)
t
Next, choosing the fixed point O as the moment center, the angular impulsemomentum principle yields
Z tC Z tC
C
IO !b C R.d / dt D IO !b ) IO !b C .d / R dt D IO !bC (4)
t t
where IO is the mass moment of inertia of the bat relative to O and therefore is given by
IO D IG C m.` /2 ; (5)
where IG is the mass moment of inertia of the bat relative to its own mass center. Substituting Eqs. (3) and (5)
into the last of Eqs. (4), and simplifying, we have

IG C m.` /2 !b C m.` d /.d /.!bC !b / D IG C m.` /2 !bC


   

) .!bC !b /IG C m.` /2 m.` /.d / D 0: (6)


Since we expect that .!bC !b / 0, then, in order for the above equation to be satisfied, we must have
IG C m.` /2 m.` /.d / D 0; (7)
which can be solved for d to obtain the following expected result:

IG C m`.` /
dD :
m.` /

August 10, 2009


1182 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.84

A batter is swinging a 34 in: long bat with weight WB D 32 oz, mass center G,
and mass moment of inertia IG D 0:0413 slugft2 . The center of rotation of the
bat is point Q. Compute the distance d identifying the position of point P , the
bats sweet spot or center of percussion, such that the batter will not feel any
impulsive forces at O where he is grasping the bat. In addition, knowing that
the ball, weighing 5 oz, is traveling at a speed vb D 90 mph and that the batter
is swinging the bat with an angular velocity !0 D 45 rad=s, determine the speed
of the ball and the angular velocity of the bat immediately after impact. To
solve the problem, use the following data: D 6 in:,  D 14 in:, ` D 22:5 in:,
and COR e D 0:5.

Solution

If there is no impulsive force at the grip, then the impact-relevant


FBD of the system is that shown on the right. Let t and t C are the
time instants right before and right after the impact, respectively,
and where !BC denotes the component of the angular velocity of
the bat in the direction right after impact, whereas !B D !0 is
the angular velocity of the bat right before impact. Then, using the FBD on the right, the linear impulse
momentum principle for the bat in the y direction gives
Z tC Z tC
C
m !0 . C `/ C N dt D mB !B . C `/ ) N dt D mB . C `/.!BC C !0 / (1)
B t t
mB vGy C
mB vGy

where mB is the mass of the bat, and where we have used rigid body kinematics to express the y component
of the velocity of G, i.e. vGy , before and after impact.
Similarly, choosing point Q as the moment center, and since the bat is in a fixed axis rotation about Q,
the application of the angular impulsemomentum principle gives,
Z tC Z tC
C
IQ !0 C N. C d / dt D IQ !B ) IQ !0 C . C d / N dt D IQ !BC ; (2)
t t

where we have accounted for the fact that  and d are constants, and where IQ is the mass moment of inertia
of the bat about Q and is therefore given by
IQ D IG C mB . C `/2 D 0:6161 slugft2 ; (3)
where we have used the following data: IG D 0:0413 slugft2 , mB D 32 oz.16 oz=lb/ 1 =.32:2 ft=s2 / D
0:06211 slug,  D 14 in: D 1:167 ft, and ` D 22:5 in: D 1:875 ft. Substituting the expression for the impulse
of N from Eq. (1) and the expression for IQ from the last of Eqs. (3) into the last of Eqs. (2), and solving for
d we have
IG
dD C ` D 2:094 ft; (4)
mB . C `/
where we have used the following data: IG D 0:0413 slugft2 , mB D 32 oz.16 oz=lb/ 1 =.32:2 ft=s2 / D
0:06211 slug,  D 14 in: D 1:167 ft, and ` D 22:5 in: D 1:875 ft. Expressing the above result to three
significant figures, we have
d D 2:09 ft:

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1183

The impact-relevant FBD of the bat-ball system is shown to the right.


We observe that the LOI is parallel to the y direction and that systems
angular momentum about the fixed point Q must be conserved since
there are no external impulsive forces acting of the system when the
ball hits the bat right on the sweet spot. Therefore, we have

IQ !0 C mb vby . C d / D IQ !BC . C `/ C mb vby


C
. C d /; (5)

C
where mb is the mass of the ball, and where vby and vby are the components of the velocity of the ball in the
y direction right before and right after impact. Neglecting the thickness of the bat, the point on the bat that is
hit by the ball moves just like point P . Therefore the COR equation for this problem is
C
vby vPCy D e.vP y vby /: (6)

Because the bat is in a fixed axis rotation about point Q, we have that

vP y D !0 . C d / and vPCy D !BC . C d /: (7)

Observing that the ball moves parallel to the y direction before impact that using the standard assumption
that the contact between the two colliding bodies is frictionless, we must have
C
vby D vb ; vbx D 0; and vbx D 0: (8)

Substituting Eqs. (7) and the first of Eqs. (8) into Eq. (6) we have
C
vby !BC . C d / D e !0 . C d / vby : (9)

After substituting the first of Eqs. (8) into Eq. (5), we see that Eqs. (5) and (9) form a system of two equations
in the two unknowns !BC and vby C
whose solution is

mb . C d /e!0 . C d / C .1 C e/vb IQ !0
!BC D ; (10)
mb . C d /2 C IQ
C vb mb . C d /2 eIQ .1 C e/IQ !0 . C d /
vby D : (11)
mb . C d /2 C IQ

Finally, recalling that the post impact speed of the ball is vbC D jvby
C
j and expressing the angular velocity of
the bat in vector form, we have

!EB D . 26:6 rad=s/ kO and vbC D 226 ft=s ;

where we have used the following numerical data: mb D 5 oz.16 oz=lb/ 1 =.32:2 ft=s2 / D 0:009705 slug,
 D 14 in: D 1:167 ft, d D 2:094 ft (see Eq. (4)), e D 0:5, !0 D 45 rad=s, vb D 90 mph D 132:0 ft=s, and
IQ D 0:6161 slugft2 (see Eq. (3)).

August 10, 2009


1184 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.85

A bullet B weighing 147 gr (1 lb D 7000 gr) is fired with a speed v0 as shown


and becomes embedded in the center of a rubber block of dimensions h D 4:5 in:
and w D 6 in: weighing Wrb D 2 lb. The rubber block is attached to the end of a
uniform thin rod A of length L D 1:5 ft, weight Wr D 5 lb, and that is pinned at
O. After the impact, the rod (with the block and the bullet embedded in it) swings
upward to an angle of 60 . Determine the speed of the bullet right before impact.

Solution

The solution of this problem is organized in two parts. The first is the determi-
nation of the postimpact angular velocity of the ballistic pendulum based on the
knowledge of the maximum swing angle. The second is the determination of the
preimpact speed of the bullet based on the result of the first part.
We will relate the maximum swing angle to the post-impact angular velocity
of the ballistic pendulum using the work-energy principle. We therefore begin
by defining the and needed to apply the work-energy principle. We define
to be the position with  D 0 immediately after impact and will be that
corresponding to  D max D 60 .
Referring to the FBD above on the right, observe that the system rotates about the fixed point O and that
the only forces doing work are the weights of the bar, of the block, and of the bullet. Since the forces doing
work are conservative, we can write
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where observing that the ballistic pendulum is in a fixed axis rotation about O and that it comes to a stop
when at , we have
2
T1 D 12 IO !p1 and T2 D 0; (2)

where IO is the mass moment of inertia of the entire system relative to O and where !Ep D !p kO is the
angular velocity of the ballistic pendulum. Observing that by assumption the bullet ends up occupying the
same position as the center of mass of the block, and applying the parallel axis theorem, IO is given by

2
2 2
2
IO D 1
12 .Wr =g/L C .Wr =g/ 1
2L C 1
12 .Wrb =g/.w C h2 / C .Wrb =g/ L C 12 h
2
C .WB =g/ L C 12 h D 0:2972 slugft2 ; (3)

where g is the acceleration due to gravity, Wr =g is the mass of the rod, Wrb =g is the mass of the rubber
block, WB =g is the mass of the bullet, and where we have used the following numerical data: Wr D 5 lb,
g D 32:2 ft=s2 , L D 1:5 ft, Wrb D 2 lb, w D 6 in: D 0:5000 ft, h D 4:5 in: D 0:3750 ft, and WB D
147 gr D 0:02100 lb.
As far as the potential energies are concerned, due to our choice of datum, we have

V1 D Wr .L=2/ .Wrb C WB /L C .h=2/ D 7:160 ftlb; (4)


V2 D Wr .L=2/ cos max .Wrb C WB /L C .h=2/ cos max D 3:580 ftlb; (5)

Substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1) and solving for !p1 we have
s
2.V2 V1 /
!p1 D D 4:908 rad=s; (6)
IO
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1185

where we have let !p1 be positive since the pendulum will move counterclockwise after impact, and where
we have used the following numerical data: V2 D 3:580 ftlb (see Eq. (5)), V1 D 7:160 ftlb (see Eq. (4)),
and IO D 0:2972 slugft2 (see Eq. (3)).
Now, we deal with the impact part of the problem. The impact at hand is a constrained
eccentric impact. The impact-relevat FBD is shown on the right and it implies that the
angular momentum of the system about the fixed point O must be conserved. This is
expressed by the following equation:

hEO D hEC
O; (7)

where the angular momentum of the system about O consists of a contribution due to
the ballistic pendulum and one due to the bullet. To compute these contributions and
recalling the pre-imapct conditions of the system, we define the following kinematic quantities:

E !EpC D !pC ; rEB=O D L C 1 h |O; vE D v0 {O; vEC D !EpC  rEB=O D !pC L C 1 h {O; (8)
 
!Ep D 0; 2 B B 2

where the last of Eqs. (8) expresses the fact that right after impact the bullet moves as part of the ballistic
pendulum, where the latter is modeled as a rigid body.
Next, using Eqs. (8), we have
WB v0
hEO D IO !Ep C rEB=O  .WB =g/E
vB D .h C 2L/ kO and hEC C C O
O D IO !p k; (9)
2g
C
where IO and IO are the mass moment of inertia of the ballistic pendulum about O before and after the
bullet becomes embedded into the rubber block, respectively.
Substituting Eqs. (9) into Eq. (7) and solving for v0 we obtain
C C
2gIO !p
v0 D : (10)
WB .h C 2L/
C
Now we observe that IO is precisely the mass moment of inertia given in Eq. (3) and that !pC is the angular
velocity computed in Eq. (6). Therefore, Eq. (10) can be evaluated to obtain

v0 D 1330 ft=s;

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , IO C


D IO D 0:2972 slugft2 (see
C
Eq. (3)), !p D !p1 D 4:908 rad=s (see Eq. (6)), h D 4:5 in: D 0:3750 ft, L D 1:5 ft, and WB D 147 gr D
0:02100 lb.

August 10, 2009


1186 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.86

A thin homogeneous bar A of length ` D 1:75 m and mass m D 23 kg is


translating as shown with a speed v0 D 12 m=s when it collides with the fixed
obstacle B. Modeling the contact between the bar and obstacle as frictionless,
letting D 32 , and letting the distance d D 0:46 m, determine the angular
velocity of the bar immediately after the collision, knowing that the COR for
the impact is e D 0:74.

Solution

The impact-relevant FBD of the bar under the stated assumptions is shown on
the right. Based on this FBD, and recalling that the superscripts and C denote
the time instants right before and right after the collision, we see that the linear
momentum of the bar in the direction perpendicular the the LOI is conserved,
i.e.,
C
mvGx D mvGx ; (1)
where m is the mass of the bar, G denotes the bars center of mass, and
vEG D vGx {O C vGy |O is the velocity of the mass center of the bar. In addition,
observe that the impulsive force acting on the bar contributes no moment about
point Q, which is the point on the bar that comes into contact with the obstacle B. Therefore, the angular
momentum of the bar about the fixed point that happens to coincide with Q at the instant of impact must be
conserved through the impact and this conservation statement can be written in scalar form as follows:
IG !b m.`=2/ d vGy D IG !bC m.`=2/ C
d vGy ; (2)
1
where IG D 12 m`2 is the mass moment of inertia of the bar, and where !E b D !b kO is the angular velocity of
the bar.
The COR equation for the problem is
C
vQy D evQy ; (3)
Given the motion of the bar preceding the impact, we have
!b D 0; vGx D v0 cos ; vGy D v0 sin ; vQy D v0 sin : (4)
In addition, using rigid body kinematics, right after impact we must have
C C
vQy D vGy C !bC .`=2/ d : (5)
After substituting Eqs. (5) and (4) into Eq. (3), Eqs. (1)(3) form a system of three equations in the three
C C
unknowns vGx , vGy and !bC whose solution is

C C .3 e/`2 12d ` C 12d 2 3.1 C e/.` 2d /v0 sin


vGx D v0 cos ; vGy D v0 sin ; !bC D ;
4.`2 3d ` C 3d 2 / 2.`2 3d ` C 3d 2 /
so that the last of the above results can be evaluated to obatin

!E bC D .10:7 rad=s/ kO ;

where we have used the following numerical data: e D 0:74, ` D 1:75 m, d D 0:46 m, v0 D 12 m=s, and
D 32 .
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1187

Problem 8.87

A drawbridge of length ` D 30 ft and weight W D 600 lb is released in the position


shown and freely pivots clockwise until it strikes the right end of the moat. If the COR
for the collision between the bridge and the ground is e D 0:45 and if the contact
point between the bridge and the ground is effectively ` away from the bridges pivot
point, determine the angle to which the bridge rebounds after the collision. Neglect
any possible source of friction.

Solution
The solution is organized in three parts. The first part will deal with the determination of the preimpact
conditions between the bridge and the ground. This part will be solved applying the work-energy principle.
The second part will concern the solution of the impact problem between the bridge and the ground. The
third part will concern the determination of the rebound angle and will again be solved using the work-energy
principle.
We define and to be the positions at released and when the bridge first
strijes the ground respectively. From the above FBD we see that the only
force doing work is gravity. Hence, we can apply the work-energy principle
in the form of the conservation of energy, i.e.,

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, given the fact that the system is released from rest, our choice of datum, and that the system is in a
fixed axis rotation about O once released, we have
2
T1 D 0 V1 D 12 `W; T2 D 21 IO !b2 ; V2 D 0; (2)

and where !E b D !b kO is the angular velocity of the bridge and, letting g denote the acceleration due to
gravity,
W ` 2
 
1 W 1W 2
IO D `C D ` : (3)
12 g g 2 3 g
Substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1), using the expression of IO in Eq. (3), and solving for !b2 , we have
r
3g
!b2 D ; (4)
`
where the minus sign is due to the fact that we know that the bridge is rotating clockwise in going from to
.
Here we consider the impact of the bridge and the ground. The impact-relevant
FBD of the bridge illustrates the fact that this is a constrained impact in which no
momentum conservation principle can be invoked. The only governing equation
that can be written for this impact is the coefficient of restitution equation long
the LOI. Let Q be the point on the bridge that comes into contact with the ground.
Then, accounting for the fact that the ground does not move, we have
C
vQy D evQy : (5)

August 10, 2009


1188 Solutions Manual

Now observe that defined earlier coincides with the preimapact configuration of the body. Hence, using
rigid body kinematics, and observing that the body can only rigidly rotate about O, we must have
p C
vQy D !b2 ` D eg` and vQy D !bC `: (6)

Substituting Eq. (6) into Eq. (5) and solving for !bC , we have
r
C 3g
!b D e : (7)
`
We now apply the work-energy principle again to determine the rebound angle. Let and be the
postimpact and max swing angle positions, respectively, The FBD for this part of the problem is identical to
that given at the beginning of the problem. Hence, we have

T3 C V3 D T4 C V4 ; (8)

where, using Eq. (3) and the result in eq. (7), as well as the datum defined earlier and the fact that the angular
velocity of the bridge at is equal to zero, we have
r !2
11W 2 3g
T3 D ` e D 21 e 2 `W; V3 D 0; T2 D 0; V2 D 12 ` cos 4 W: (9)
23 g `

Substituting Eqs. (9) into Eq. (8) and solving for 4 , we have
1
4 D cos .e 2 /; (10)

which, recalling that 4 is the rebound angle we are looking for and that e D 0:45, we have

rebound D 78:3 :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1189

Problem 8.88

A stick A with length ` D 1:55 m and mass mA D 6 kg is in static equilibrium as shown


when a ball B with mass mB D 0:15 kg traveling at a speed v0 D 30 m=s strikes the
stick at distance d D 1:3 m from the lower end of the stick. If the COR for the impact is
e D 0:85, determine the velocity of the mass center G of the stick as well as the sticks
angular velocity right after the impact.

Solution

The point on the bar A that first comes into contact with the ball B is point
Q. As indicated in the FBDs on the right, we will use a Cartesian coordinate
system with origin at the fixed point O that happens to coincide with the points
Q and B at the time of impact. The LOI coincides with the chosen x axis.
The impact is an unconstrained direct eccentric impact between the rigid body
A and the particle B. This impact is therefore governed by the following
equations:
C C
mA vGx C mB vBx D mA vGx C mB vBx ; (1)
C
vGy D vGy ; (2)
C
vBy D vBy ; (3)
IG !EA C rEG=O  vEG D IG !EAC C rEG=O  vEG
C
; (4)
C C
vQx vBx D e.vBx vQx /; (5)

where IG is the mass oment of inertia of bar A about its own mass center.
Equation (1) expresses the conservation of the linear momentum of the system
along the LOI. Equation (2) expresses the conservation of the linear momentum
of A along the line perpendicular to the LOI. Equation (3) expresses the conservation of the linear momentum
of B along the line perpendicular to the LOI. Equation (4) expresses the conservation of the angular linear
momentum of A about the fixed point O. Finally, Eq. (5) is the COR equation along the line of impact
expressed in terms of the velocities of the points that actually come into contact.
We now consider the kinematic equations of the problem. The preimpact velocities are specified and can
be summarized as follows:

!A D 0; vGx D 0; vGy D 0; vQx D 0; vBx D v0 ; and vBy D 0: (6)

We now need to express the postimpact velocity of Q in terms of post-mpact the velocity of G and of the
postimpact angular velocity of A. Using rigid body kinematics we have
C C
C !EAC  rEQ=G C C C
|O C !AC kO  d 1

vEQ D vEG ) vEQ D vGx {O C vGy 2` |O
C C 1
 C
) vQx D vGx d 2` !A : (7)

Substituting Eqs. (6) and the last of Eqs. (7) into Eqs. (1)(5) we have
C C
mB v0 D mA vGx C mB vBx ; (8)
C
0 D vGy ; (9)
C
0 D vBy ; (10)
August 10, 2009
1190 Solutions Manual
1 2 C 1
 C
0D 12 mA ` !A C d 2` vGx ; (11)
C 1
 C C
vGx d 2` !A vBx D ev0 ; (12)
1
mA `2 and rEG=O D d 12 ` |O, and where we have written

where we have used the fact that IG D 12
Eq. (11) in scalar form since the corresponding vector equation has only one nonzero component, namely
that in the direction.
Equations (9) and (10) simply indicate that neither G nor B move in the y direction right after impact.
Equations (8), (11), and (12) form a system of three equations in the three unknowns !AC , vGx
C C
, and vBx
whose solution is
6mB v0 .1 C e/.2d `/
!AC D ; (13)
12d mB .d `/ C .mA C 4mB /`2
C mB v0 .1 C e/`2
vGx D ; (14)
12d mB .d `/ C .mA C 4mB /`2
C mA v0 .1 C e/`2
vBx D v0 : (15)
12d mB .d `/ C .mA C 4mB /`2
Hence, using Eqs. (14), (9), and (13), we have

C
vEG D . 1:31 m=s/ {O and !EAC D .3:43 rad=s/ kO ;

where we have used the following numerical data: mB D 0:15 kg, v0 D 30 m=s, e D 0:85, d D 1:3 m,
` D 1:55 m, and mA D 6 kg.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1191

Problem 8.89

A uniform bar A with a hook H at the end is dropped as shown from a height
d D 3 ft over a fixed pin B. Letting the weight and length of A be W D 100 lb
and ` D 7 ft, respectively, determine the angle  that the bar will sweep through
if the bar becomes hooked with B and does not rebound. Although bar A
becomes hooked with B, assume that there is no friction between the hook and
the pin.

Solution
The solution of this problem is organized in three parts. The first is the determination of the impact speed
between the bar and the pin B. The second is the determination of the postimpact angular velocity of the
bar using impact theory. The third is the determination of the angle swept by the bar using the work-energy
principle.
We define to be the position of the bar at release and to be the position of
the bar right before impact. Since there is no force that would cause the bar to
rotate between and , the bar will translate between the two positions. The
only force doing work is gravity. Hence, we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, accounting for the fact that the system is only translating after being released from rest and due to our
choice of datum, we have
2
T1 D 0; T2 D 21 .W =g/vG2 ; V1 D W d; V2 D 0; (2)

where g is the acceleration due to gravity, W =g is the mass of the bar, G is the mass center of the bar, and vG
is the speed of G. Substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1) and solving for vG2 , we have
p
vG2 D 2gd : (3)

Now, we deal with the impact part of the problem with the understanding that
the preimpact conditions coincide with the conditions in just computed.
The impact-relevat FBD is shown on the right, where we observe that the
hook H now is in contact (and therefore coincides) with the fixed point B.
We classify the impact as a constrained eccentric impact and its behavior of
governed by the conservation of angular momentum of the bar about B, which, in scalar form reads
C
hB D hB ; (4)

where, recalling that before impact the bar is simply translating in the vertical direction and that after impact
the bar is in a fixed axis rotation about B, we have
1 C
hB D 2 `.W =g/vGy and hB D IB !bC ; (5)

where vGy is the y component of the velocity of the center of mass G, IB is the mass moment of inertia of
the bar about B, and !E b D !b kO is the angular velocity of the bar.

August 10, 2009


1192 Solutions Manual

Using the result from the work-energy part of the solution and using the parallel axis theorem, we have
1
.W =g/`2 C .W =g/.`=2/2 D 31 .W =g/`2 :
p
vGy D vG2 D 2gd and IB D 12 (6)

Then substituting Eqs. (6) into Eqs. (5) and then substituting the result in Eq. (4), we have
p
1
p
1 2 C C
3 gd
2 `.W =g/ 2gd D 3 .W =g/` !b ) !b D p : (7)
2`

We now apply the work-energy principle again. We define to be the


position of the bar immediately after impact and to be the position of
the bar as soon as it reaches the maximum swing angle swept . The FBD
of the bar in a generic position between and is shown on the right.
The reactions Hx and Hy are applied to the fixed point B, the only force
doing work is gravity, so that the work-energy principle can be written in
the following form:
T3 C V3 D T4 C V4 ; (8)
where, accounting for the fact that the system is in a fixed axis rotation about B and due to our choice of
datum, we have
2
T3 D 12 IB !b3 ; T4 D 0; V3 D 0; V4 D W 12 ` sin swept : (9)
Recalling that coincides with the position of the system right after impact and repeating the second of
Eqs. (6), we have p
3 gd
C
!b3 D !b3 D p and IB D 13 .W =g/`2 : (10)
2`
Substituting Eqs. (10) into Eqs. (9) and then substituting the result in Eq. (8), we obtain
 
1 2 9gd 1 1 3d
6 .W =g/` 2`2 D W 2 ` sin swept ) swept D sin
2`
: (11)

Now, recalling that d D 3 ft and ` D 7 ft, observe that sin 1 3d=.2`/ D 40:01 , and therefore, based
on the definition of the angle , this corresponds to a solution for swept equal to 180 C 40:01 , i.e.,

swept D 220 :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1193

Problem 8.90

A gymnast on the uneven parallel bars has a vertical speed v0 and no angular speed when she grasps the
upper bar. Model the gymnast as a single uniform rigid bar A of weight W D 92 lb and length ` D 6 ft.
Neglecting all friction, letting D 12 , and assuming that the upper bar B does not move after the
gymnast grasps it, determine v0 if the gymnast is to swing (counterclockwise) so as to become horizontal.
Assume that, during the motion, the friction between the gymnasts hands and the upper bar is negligible.

Solution

The problem can be divided into two parts. First we relate v0 to the angular
velocity of the gymnast right after she grasps the upper bar. Then we use the
work energy principle to relate the angular velocity in question to the final
position of the gymnast. The impact-relevant FBD of the system is shown
to the right. This FBD implies that the angular momentum of the gymnast
about B is conserved, i.e.,
IG !g mg vGy .`=2/ cos D IB !gC ; (1)
where mg is the mass of the gymnast, IG and IB are the mass moments of inertia of the gymnast about her
own mass center and point B, respectively, and where we have used the fact that, after she grasps the upper
bar, the gymnast will be in a fixed axis rotation about B. For IG and IB we have

2
IG D 1
12 mg ` and IB D IG C mg .`=2/2 D 13 mg `2 : (2)
Recalling that !g D 0 and that vGy D v0 , substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1) and solving for !gC we have

3v0 cos
!gC D : (3)
2`

Now let and be the positions of the gymnast right after she grasps
the upper bar and when she becomes horizontal. The FBD of the gymnast
between and is shown to the right. Since the only forces acting on the
system are conservative, we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 : (4)

Since the gymnast is in a fixed axis rotation about B, and because of the
choice of datum line, we have

T1 D 31 IB .!gC /2 ; V1 D mg g.`=2/ sin ; T2 D 0; V2 D 0: (5)

August 10, 2009


1194 Solutions Manual

Substituting Eqs. (5) into Eq. (4) and solving for v0 , we have

s
4g` sin
v0 D D 7:48 ft=s;
3 cos2

where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , ` D 6 ft, and D 12 .

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1195

Problem 8.91

A uniform thin ring A of mass m D 7 kg and radius r D 0:5 m is released from


rest as shown and rolls without slip until it meets a step of height ` D 0:45 m.
Letting D 12 and assuming that the ring does not rebound off the step or
slip relative to it, determine the distance d such that the ring barely makes it
over the step.

Solution
The solution is organized in three parts. In the first part we relate the preimpact angular velocity of the ring to
the distance d . This part will be solved applying the work-energy principle. The second part will concern the
solution of the impact problem between the ring and the step. The solution of this second part will allow us
to express the postimpact velocity of the ring as a function of d . In the third part we will establish a relation
between the postimpact angular velocity of the ring, viewed as a function of d , and the size of the step such
that the ring barely makes it over the step. This last part will be solved via the work-energy principle.
We denote by the position of the ring at release. We then denote by
the position of the ring when it first strikes the step. To make the
calculations easier to follow, referring to the figure on the right, we
now consider some geometrical details of the ring at . Point P is
the edge of the step. Point G is both the center and the center of mass
of the ring. Point E is the point on the ring such that the segment GE
is parallel to the incline. While this may appear a small detail, point
E hangs a distance over the step. The length h denotes the vertical
distance in between G and P . Using trigonometry we have
 
1 r `
r sin D r ` ) D sin D 5:739 ; (1)
r

where we have used the following numerical data: r D 0:5 m and ` D 0:45 m. Furthermore, we have

D r.1 cos / D 0:002506 m and h D r sin. C / D 0:1523 m; (2)

where we have used the value of in Eq. (1) and the fact that r D 0:5 m and D 12 .
We now apply the work-energy principle between and . Given the FBD
on the right and recalling that the ring rolls without slip between and ,
we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (3)
where, given our choice of datum and again recalling that the system is
released from rest and then rolls without slip, we have
2
T1 D 0; V1 D mg.d C / sin C h; T2 D 21 IQ !r2 ; V2 D mgh; (4)

where !E r D !r kO is the angular velocity of the ring, the length d C is the length parallel to the incline
by which the center of mass G moves between and , and where IQ is the mass moment of inertia with
respect to Q and, applying the parallel axis theorem, is given by

IQ D mr 2 C mr 2 D 2mr 2 : (5)

August 10, 2009


1196 Solutions Manual

Substituting Eqs. (4) into Eq. (3) and using Eq. (5), we have
p
2 2 .d C /g sin
mg.d C / sin C h D mr !r2 C mgh ) !r2 D ; (6)
r
where the minus sign expresses the fact that in the ring is rotating clockwise.
We now consider the collision of the ring with the step. The impact-
relevant FBD is shown on the right and it indicates that this is a con-
strained impact. The only conservation principle we can invoke is the
conservation of angular momentum about P . Keeping in mind that be-
fore impact G does not have a y component of velocity and that right
after impact the ring moves as though in a fixed axis rotation about P ,
we have
IG !r mvGx .r `/ D IP !rC ; (7)
where
IG D mr 2 ; IP D mr 2 C mr 2 D 2mr 2 ; (8)
p
.d C /g sin p
!r D !r2 D ; vGx D r!r D .d C /g sin ; (9)
r
where we have used the parallel axis theorem in the last of Eqs. (8), and where the last of Eqs. (9) expresses
the fact that right before impact the ring is rolling without slip.
Substituting Eqs. (8) and (9) into Eq. (7) and solving for !rC , we obtain
2r ` p
!rC D .d C /g sin : (10)
2r 2

We now define to coincide with the position of the ring right after
impact and with the position in which point G is vertically aligned
with point P . To say that the ring barely makes it over the step implies
that the ring comes to a stop in . The FBD of the ring in a generic
position between and is shown on the right. Under the assumption
that the ring does not slip over the edge of the step, we have
T3 C V3 D T4 D V4 ; (11)
where, recalling that between and the ring moves as though in a
fixed axis rotation about P , we have
2
T3 D 21 IP !r3 ; V3 D mgh; T4 D 0; V4 D mgr; (12)
where the length h is shown in the figure at the beginning of this solution.
Observing that IP is given in the second of Eqs. (8) and that !r3 D !rC , which is given in Eq. (10),
substituting Eqs. (12) into Eq. (11) we have
2
4r 2 .r h/

1 2 2r `p
2 2mr .d C /g sin C mgh D mgr ) d D ; (13)
2r 2 .2r `/2 sin
which can be evaluated to obtain
d D 5:53 m;

where we have used the following numerical data: r D 0:5 m, h D 0:1523 m (see the second of Eq. (2)),
` D 0:45 m, D 12 , and D 0:002506 m (see the first of Eqs. (2)).
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1197

Problem 8.92

Two identical uniform bars AB and BD are pin-connected at B; and bar BD


has a hook at the free end. The two bars are dropped as shown from a height
d D 3 ft over a fixed pin E (shown in cross section). Letting the weight and
length of each bar be W D 100 lb and ` D 7 ft, respectively, determine the
angular velocities of AB and BD immediately after bar BD becomes hooked on
E and does not rebound. Hint: The angular momentum of bar AB is conserved
about B during impact.

Solution
The figure below shows the impact-relevant FBDs of the system and of bar AB.

These FBDs imply that the angular momentum of the system about E and the angular momentum of bar AB
about B are conserved through the impact. Hence, letting !EAB D !AB kO and !EBD D !BD kO denote the
angular velocities of AB and BD, respectively, we have
C C 3 C C 1
IG !AB mvGy 32 ` IF !BD mvF y 21 ` D IG !AB mvGy 2` IF !BD mvF y 2 `; (1)
C C 1
IG !AB mvGy 12 ` D IG !AB mvGy 2 `; (2)

where, m is the common value of the masses of the bars AB and BD, and where IG and IF are the mass
moments of inertia of bars AB and BD about their respective mass centers. Since these bars are identical,
we have
IG D IF D 12 1
m`2 : (3)
Since both bars fall from rest over a distance d while remaining horizontal, we have
p p
vGy D 2gd ; !AB D 0; vF y D 2gd ; !BD D 0: (4)

Once bar BD is hooked at E, bar BD will be in a fixed axis rotation about E. Using this fact, and recalling
that we must have vEG D vEB C !EAB  rEG=B , right after impact (i.e., while the bars are still in the same
horizontal position they had right before impact), we have
C C C C C C C
vF y D !BD .`=2/; vBy D !BD ` ) vGy D !BD ` !AB .`=2/: (5)

Substituting Eqs. (3)(5) into Eqs. (1) and (2), we obtain a system of two equations in the two unknowns
C C
!AB and !BD whose solution is
p p
C 3 2dg C 9 2dg
!AB D and !BD D ; (6)
7` 7`
which can be evaluated to obtain

C
!EAB D . 0:851 rad=s/ kO and C
!EBD D .2:55 rad=s/ kO ;

where we have used the following numerical data: d D 3 ft, ` D 7 ft, and g D 32:2 ft=s2 .
August 10, 2009
1198 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.93

Cars A and B collide as shown. Determine the angular velocities of A and B


immediately after impact if the COR is e D 0:35. In solving the problem, let
C and D be the mass centers of A and B, respectively. In addition, enforce
assumption 3 on p. 649 and use the following data: WA D 3130 lb (weight of
A), kC D 34:5 in: (radius of gyration of A), vC D 12 mph (speed of the mass
center of A), WB D 3520 lb (weight of B), kD D 39:3 in: (radius of gyration
of B), vD D 15 mph (speed of the mass center of B), d D 19 in:, ` D 79 in:,
D 7:1 in:,  D 65 in:, and D 12 .

Solution
We model the impact as an unconstrainted oblique eccentric impact of two rigid bodies. The figure below
shows the FBD of the system as a whole (top) and the FBDs of cars A and B separately (bottom).

The contact between the two bodies occurs at point P on car A and at point Q on car B. Point O is the fixed
point in space that happens to coincide with points P and Q at the time of impact. We define a Cartesian
coordinate system with origin at O and the x axis aligned with the LOI. For convenience, we also introduce
unit vectors uO h and uO v (the subscripts h and v stand for horizontal and vertical, respectively) as shown on the
FBDs. Based on the assumptions underlying the impact theory in the textbook, the impact is governed by the
following relations:
C C
mA vC x C mB vDx D mA vC x C mB vDx ; (1)
C
vCy D vCy ; (2)
C
vDy D vDy ; (3)
hEO A D hEC
 
O A; (4)
hEO B D hEC
 
O B; (5)
C C
vQx vP x D e.vP x vQx /; (6)

which, in order, express the conservation of linear momentum for the system along the LOI, the conservation
of linear momentum for car A in the direction perpendicular to the LOI, the conservation of linear momentum
for car B in the direction perpendicular to the LOI, the conservation of the angular momentum of A about the
fixed point O, the conservation of the angular momentum of B about the fixed point O, and the COR equation
along the LOI written in terms of the velocities of the points on A and B that actually come into contact.
August 10, 2009
Dynamics 1e 1199

We now need to express the angular momentum conservation laws and the COR equation in terms of the
the velocities of the cars mass centers as well as the cars angular velocities. For this purpose, we introduce
the following unit vectors:

uO h D cos {O C sin |O and uO v D sin {O D cos |O: (7)

We also introduce the position vectors necessary to compute the angular momenta of the cars as well as the
velocities of points P and Q:

rEC =O D  uO h uO v D . cos C sin / {O C . sin cos / |O; (8)


rED=O D ` uO h C d uO v D .` cos C d sin / {O C . ` sin C d cos / |O; (9)
rEP =C D rEC =O D . cos C sin / {O . sin cos / |O; (10)
rEQ=D D rED=O D .` cos C d sin / {O C .` sin d cos / |O: (11)

Next we describe the velocity vectors needed to evaluate the angular momenta and the COR equation.
Specifically, accounting for the preimpact conditions, for car A, we write
C C C
vEC D vC uO h D vC .cos {O C sin |O/; vEC D vC x {O C vCy |O; (12)
E
!EA D 0; O
!EAC D !AC k; (13)
C C C
vP x D vC cos ; vP x D vC x C !A . sin cos /; (14)

where, to evaluate vP x and vPCx , we have used rigid body kinematics according to which we must have
vEP D vEC

C !EA  rEP =C (which requires the use of Eq. (10) above). Similarly, for car B we have
C C C
vED D vD uO h D vD .cos {O C sin |O/; vED D vDx {O C vDy |O; (15)
E
!EB D 0; O
!EBC D !BC k; (16)
C C C
vQx D vD cos ; vQx D vDx C !B .d cos ` sin /; (17)
C
where, to evaluate vQx and vQx , we have used rigid body kinematics according to which we must have

vEQ D vED C !EB  rEQ=D (which requires the use of Eq. (11) above).
We are now in a position to compute the expressions of the angular momenta of A and B about point O
that we will need to substitute in Eqs. (4) and (5). Specifically, we have

hEO O

A
D IC !EA C rEC =O  mA vEC D mA vC k; (18)
hEC EAC C rEC =O  mA vEC C

O A D IC !
D IC !AC C mA vC C C O
 
x . cos  sin / C mA vCy . sin C  cos / k; (19)
hEO B D ID !EB C rED=O  mB vED D mB vD d k; O

(20)
hEC EAC C rEC =O  mB vED C

O B D ID !
D ID !BC C mB vDx C C O
 
. d cos C ` sin / mB vDy .d sin C ` cos / k; (21)

where we have made use of Eqs. (8) and (9) and well as of Eqs. (12), (13), (15), and (16).
We are now ready to rewrite Eqs. (1)(6). Specifically, using the appropriate kinematic relations developed
above we have
C C
mA vC cos C mB vD cos D mA vC x C mB vDx ; (22)
C
vC sin D vCy ; (23)
August 10, 2009
1200 Solutions Manual
C
vD sin D vDy ; (24)
C C
mA vC D IC !A C mA vC x . cos  sin /
C
C mA vCy . sin C  cos /; (25)
C C
mB vD d D ID !B C mB vDx . d cos C ` sin /
C
mB vDy .d sin C ` cos /; (26)
C
vDx C !BC .d cos ` sin / C
vC C
x C !A . sin cos / D e.vC cos C vD cos /; (27)

where we have written Eqs. (25) and (26) in scalar form because the corresponding vector equations had only
one nonzero component, namely, that in the direction.
C C C C C C
Equations (22)(27) form a system of six equations in the six unknowns vC x , vCy , !A , vDx , vDy , !B .
C C
Notice that Eqs. (23) and (24), allow us to directly evaluate vCy and vDy , wfor which we obtain
C C
vCy D 3:659 ft=s and vDy D 4:574 ft=s; (28)

where we have used the following numerical data: vC D 12:0 mph D 17:60 ft=s, D 12 , and vD D
15 mph D 22:00 ft=s. This result allows us to treat the quantities in Eqs. (28) as known, and therefore to
C
rewrite Eqs. (22) and (25)(27) numerically as the following system of 4 equations in the 4 unknowns vC x,
C C C
!A , vDx , !B :
C C
.97:20 slug/vC x C .109:3 slug/vDx D 678:7 lbs; (29)
C 2 C
. 53:22 slugft/vC x C .803:5 slugft /!A D 916:0 ftlbs; (30)
C
. 19:64 slugft/vDx C .1172 slugft2 /!BC D 422:0 ftlbs; (31)
C C C C
vC x C vDx C . 0:5475 ft/!A C .0:1797 ft/!B D 13:56 ft=s; (32)

where we have placed all of the unknowns on the left-hand sides of the above equaitions and where, in
addition to the results in Eqs. (28), we have used the following numerical data:

D 7:1 in: D 0:5917 ft;  D 65 in: D 5:417 ft; (33)


d D 19 in: D 1:583 ft; ` D 79 in: D 6:583 ft; e D 0:35; (34)

and
2
mA D .WA =g/ D 97:20 slug; IC D .WA =g/kC D 803:5 slugft2 ; (35)
2 2
mB D .WB =g/ D 109:3 slug; ID D .WB =g/kD D 1172 slugft ; (36)

where g is the acceleration due to gravity and WA D 3130 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , kC D 34:5 in: D 2:875 ft,
WB D 3520 lb, and kD D 39:3 in: D 1:583 ft. The solution of Eqs. (29)(32) is as follows:
C
vC x D 9:905 ft=s; !AC D 1:796 rad=s; C
vDx D 2:599 ft=s; !BC D 0:4036 rad=s: (37)

Hence, expressing the answer in vector form and using three significant figures, we have

!EAC D .1:80 rad=s/ kO and !EBC D . 0:404 rad=s/ kO @ 12 :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1201

Problem 8.94

Consider the collision of two rigid bodies A and B, which, referring to Exam-
ple 8.10 on p. 635, models the docking of the Space Shuttle (body A) to the
International Space Station (body B). As in Example 8.10, we assume that
B is stationary relative to an inertial frame of reference and that A translates
as shown. In contrast to Example 8.10, here we assume that A and B join at
point Q but, due to the flexibility of the docking system, can rotate relative to
one another. Determine the angular velocities of A and B right after docking if
v0 D 0:03 m=s. In solving the problem, let C and D be the centers of mass of
A and B, respectively. In addition, let the mass and mass moment of inertia of A
be mA D 120103 kg and IC D 14106 kgm2 , respectively, and the mass and
mass moment of inertia of B be mB D 180103 kg and ID D 34106 kgm2 ,
respectively. Finally, use the following dimensions: ` D 24 m, d D 8 m,
 D 2:6 m, and D 2:4 m.

Solution

On the right we show the impact-relevant FBD of the system as a whole


(top) and of A and B individually (two bottom diagrams). Point O is the
fixed point in space which happens to coincide with point Q when A and
B first come into contact. We model the impact as a constrained eccentric
impact. Notice that we cannot apply a coefficient of restitution equation
in this problem since the impacting bodies become connected after impact.
The governing equations for this impact are therefore as follows:
C C
mA vC x C mB vDx D mA vC x C mB vDx ; (1)
C C
mA vCy C mB vDy D mA vCy C mB vDy ; (2)
IC !A C mA vC x .d / C vCy  D IC !AC C mA vC
C
x .d
C
/ C vCy ;
(3)
ID !B mB vDx C vDy .` / D ID !BC C
mB vDx C
C vDy .` /;
(4)

which, in order, express the conservation of linear momentum for the


system in the x direction, the conservation of linear momentum for the
system in the y direction, the conservation of the angular momentum for A
about O, and the conservation of angular momentum about O for B. The
kinematic equations for this problem must enforce the fact that the two
bodies become connected at Q after impact. For this purpose we introduce
the following vectors:
O
!EAC D !AC k; O
!EBC D !BC k; (5)
C C C C C C
vEC D vC x {O C vCy |O; vED D vDx {O C vDy |O; (6)
rEQ=C D  {O C .d / |O; rEQ=D D .` / {O |O: (7)

Then, the fact that A and B become connected at Q, i.e., that Q ia a common point of the two rigid
C C
bodies A and B, can be given the following vector form: vEQ D vEC C !EAC  rEQ=C D vEC
D C
!EB  rEQ=D . This
August 10, 2009
1202 Solutions Manual

relationship, using Eqs. (5)(7), carrying out the needed cross-products, and symplifying, yields the following
two scalar relations:
C
vC x .d /!AC D vDx
C
C !BC ; (8)
C C C C
vCy !A D vDy C .` /!B : (9)

Finally, we observe that the problem statement specifies the preimpact conditions, which are as follows:

vC x D v0 ; vCy D 0; !A D 0; vDx D 0; vDy D 0; !B D 0: (10)

Using Eqs. (10) and taking advantage of the given data, i.e., recalling that v0 D 0:03 m=s, mA D
120  103 kg, IC D 14  106 kgm2 , mB D 180  103 kg, ID D 34  106 kgm2 , ` D 24 m, d D 8 m,
 D 2:6 m, and D 2:4 m, we can rewrite Eqs. (1)(4) and Eqs. (8) and (9) as follows:

.1:200105 kg/vC
C 5 C
x C .1:80010 kg/vDx D 3600 kgm=s;
5 C 5 C
.1:20010 kg/vCy C .1:80010 kg/vDy D 0;
.6:720105 kgm/vC
C 5 C 7 2 C
x C .3:12010 kgm/vCy C .1:40010 kgm /!A D 2:016104 kgm2 =s;
. 4:320105 kgm/vDx
C
C . 3:852106 kgm/vDy
C
C .3:400107 kgm2 /!BC D 0;
C C C
vC x C . 5:600 m/!A vDx .2:400 m/!BC D 0;
C
vCy .2:600 m/!AC C
vDy .21:40 m/!BC D 0;

where we have placed all unknowns on the left-had sides of the equations and all known terms on the
C C C
right-hand side. The above system of equations is a system of 6 equations in the 6 unknowns vC x , vCy , !A ,
C C
vDx , vDy , and !BC whose solution is

C C
vC x D 0:01444 m=s; vCy D 0:001426 m=s; !AC D 0:0007152 rad=s;
C C C
vDx D 0:01037 m=s; vDy D 0:0009505 m=s; !B D 0:00002414 rad=s:

Hence, expressing our final result in vector form and to three significant figures, we have

!EAC D . 0:000715 rad=s/ kO and !EBC D . 0:0000241 rad=s/ kO :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1203

Problem 8.95

A uniform thin ring A and a uniform disk B roll without slip as shown. Letting
TA and TB be the kinetic energies of A and B, respectively, if the two objects
have the same mass and radius and if their centers are moving with the same
speed v0 , state which of the following statements is true and why: (a) TA < TB ;
(b) TA D TB ; (c) TA > TB .

Solution
The kinetic energies of A and B are different. In particular, the kinetic energy of A is greater then that of B.
The reason for this is that the kinetic energy of a rigid body in planar motion is given by
2
T D 21 mvG C 12 IG !b2 ;

where, m is the mass of the body, G is the center of mass of the body, vG is the speed of the center of mass,
IG is the mass moment of inertia of the body relative to the mass center, and !b represents the angular speed
of the body. In the case of A and B, the quantities mA D mB , vGA D vGB , and !A D !B . However, the
mass moments of inertia of A and B relative to the respective mass centers are different. Specifically, the
rotational inertia of A is larger than that of B and this therefore causes the kinetic energy of A to be larger
than that of B.

August 10, 2009


1204 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.96

A pendulum consists of a uniform disk A of diameter d D 5 in: and weight WA D


0:25 lb attached at the end of a uniform bar B of length L D 2:75 ft and weight
WB D 1:3 lb. At the instant shown, the pendulum is swinging with an angular velocity
! D 0:55 rad=s clockwise. Determine the kinetic energy of the pendulum at this instant,
using Eq. (8.13) on p. 594.

Solution
Observe that the system is in a fixed axis rotation about point O. Therefore the kinetic energy of the system
is given by
T D 21 IO ! 2 ; (1)
where IO is the mass moment of the system about O. Using the parallel axis theorem, we have

1 WA d 2 WA d 2 1 WB 2 WB L 2
     
IO D C LC C L C D 0:1699 slugft2 ; (2)
2 g 2 g 2 12 g g 2

where the terms WA =g and WB =g are the masses of A and B, respectively, g is the acceleration due to gravity,
and where we have used the following numerical data: g D 32:2 ft=s2 , WA D 0:25 lb, d D 5 in: D 0:4167 ft,
L D 2:75 ft, and WB D 1:3 lb.
Substituting the value for IO given in Eq. (2) into Eq. (1), we have

T D 0:0257 ftlb;

where we have also used the fact that ! D 0:55 rad=s.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1205

Problem 8.97

A uniform disk D of radius RD D 7 mm and mass mD D 0:15 kg is connected


to point O via the rotating arm OC and rolls without slip over the stationary
cylinder S of radius RS D 15 mm. Assuming that !D D 25 rad=s and treating
the arm OC as a uniform slender bar of length L D RD C RS and mass
mOC D 0:08 kg, determine the kinetic energy of the system.

Solution

The kinetic energy of the system us equal to the sum of the kinetic energy
of each part of the system. In this problem the system consists of the disk D
and the arm OC . Referring to the figure on the right, we label Q the point
on the disk D that is in contact with the stationary cylinder S . Observing
that the arm is in a fixed axis rotation about O and that the disk D is rolling
without slip and that therefore the instantaneous center of rotation of the
disk D is point Q, we have
2 2
T D 12 IO !OC C 12 IQ !D ; (1)

where IO is the mass moment of inertia of the arm OC with respect to O, !OC is the angular speed of the
arm OC , IQ is the mass moment of inertia of the disk D relative to its on center of instantaneous rotation Q,
and !D is the angular speed of the disk D.
Using the parallel axis theorem and the modeling assumptions described in the problem statement, we
have
2
1
mOC .RD C RS /2 C mOC 12 .RD C RS / D 13 mOC .RD C RS /2 D 12:9110 6 kgm2 ; (2)

IO D 12
2 2 2 6
IQ D 12 mD RD C mD RD D 32 mD RD D 11:0210 kgm2 ; (3)

where we have used the following numerical data: mOC D 0:08 kg, RD D 7 mm D 0:007000 m, RS D
15 mm D 0:01500 m, and mD D 0:15 kg.
Observe that !D is given. Hence, the only missing piece of information is the angular speed of the arm
OC . Observing that the point C is shared by both the arm OC and the disk D, and recalling that the disk D
is rolling without slip over a stationary surface, we must have
RD
vC D !D RD D !OC .RS C RD / ) !OC D !D : (4)
RS C RD
Substituting this relation into Eqs. (1), we have

2
RD
 
1 2
T D IO C IQ !D D 0:00385 J;
2 .RS C RD /2

where we have used the values of IO and IQ in Eqs. (2) and (3) as well as the following numerical data:
RD D 7 mm D 0:007000 m, RS D 15 mm D 0:01500 m, and !D D 25 rad=s.

August 10, 2009


1206 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.98

At the instant shown, the disk D, which has mass m and radius of gyration
kG , is rolling without slip down the flat incline with angular velocity !0 . The
disk is attached at its center to a wall by a linear elastic spring of constant k.
If, at the instant shown, the spring is unstretched, determine the distance d
down the incline that the disk rolls before coming to a stop. Use k D 65 N=m,
R D 0:3 m, m D 10 kg, kG D 0:25 m, !0 D 60 rpm, and  D 30 .

Solution

Referring to the FBD to the right and recalling that the disk rolls
without slip, we see that the only forces doing work on the system
are conservative. Hence, we can apply the work-energy principle in
the form of conservation of energy. Let and be the positions
of the systems at release and when the disk stops for the first time,
respectively. Then we have

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)

where, taking the datum for the potential energy of gravity at , and
accounting for the fact that at the spring is unstretched and that
at the disk comes to a stop, we have
2 2
T1 D 21 mvG1 C 12 IG !D1 ; V1 D mgd sin ; T2 D 0; V2 D 12 kd 2 ; (2)
2
where m is the mass of the disk, !D is the angular speed of the disk, and where IG D mkG is the mass
moment of inertia of the disk about its mass center. Because the disk is rolling without slip, at we must
have

vG1 D R!D1 D R!0 : (3)


Substituting Eqs. (2) into Eq. (1) and then substituting Eq. (3) into the resulting expression yields a second
order algebraic equation with the only known d whose roots are
 
1
q
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
dD mg sin  m g sin  C mkkG !0 C mkR !0 : (4)
k

Since the square root term is greater than the term mg sin , the only acceptable root is the one given by
 
1
q
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
dD mg sin  C m g sin  C mkkG !0 C mkR !0 ; (5)
k

which can be evaluated to obtain


d D 1:98 m;

where we have used the following data: m D 10 kg, g D 9:81 ft=s2 ,  D 30 , k D 65 N=m, kG D 0:25 m,
R D 0:3 m, and !0 D 60 rpm D 6:283 rad=s.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1207

Problem 8.99

The figure shows the cross section of a garage door with length L D 9 ft and
weight W D 175 lb. At the ends A and B there are rollers of negligible mass
constrained to move in a vertical and a horizontal guide, respectively. The
doors motion is assisted by two springs (only one spring is shown), each with
constant k D 9:05 lb=ft. If the door is released from rest when horizontal and
the spring is stretched 4 in:, neglecting friction, and modeling the door as a
uniform thin plate, determine the speed with which B strikes the left end of the
horizontal guide.

Solution

Referring to the FBD shown, work is done only by gravity and the
spring force. Let be the position at release and be the position
achieved by the door when B strikes the left end of the horizontal guide.
Since energy is conserved in going from to , we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (1)
where, given the choice of datum, modeling the door as a rigid body,
and recalling that the door is released from rest, we have
T1 D 0; (2)
V1 D 2 12 i2 C mAB gL; (3)
1 2 1 2
T2 D 2 mAB vG2 C 2 IG !d 2 ; (4)
V2 D 2 12 k.L C i /2 C 12 LmAB g; (5)
where mAB is the mass of the door, i is the stretch of the spring at , IG is the mass moment of inertia of
the door with respect to its own mass center G, vG is the speed of G, and !d is the angular speed of the door.
Recalling that the weight of the door is denoted by W , we have
W 1 W 2
mAB D and IG D L ; (6)
g 12 g
where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Now observe that in the door point A is at the very bottom of its
trajectory. This implies that vA2 D 0 and that A is the instantaneous center of rotation of the door. In turn,
this implies that the angular speed of the door in is !d 2 D vB2 =L, and that vG2 D !d 2 .L=2/ D vB2 =2.
Hence, we have
vG2 D 12 vB2 ; and !d 2 D vB2 =L; (7)
Substituting Eqs. (2)(5) into Eq. (1), then substituting in the resulting relation Eqs. (6) and (7), simplifying,
and solving for vB2 , we have
r
3p
vB2 D gLW 2k.L C 2i /; (8)
W
which can be evaluated to obtain
.vB /final D 0:414 ft=s;

where we have written .vB /final for vB2 and where we have used the following numerical data: W D 175 lb,
g D 32:2 ft=s2 , L D 9 ft, k D 9:05 lb=ft, and i D 4 in: D 0:3333 ft.
August 10, 2009
1208 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.100

Body B has mass m and mass moment of inertia IG , where G is the mass center
of B. If B is in fixed axis rotation about its center G,determine
ofmass which
 of
E E E

the following statements is true and why: (a) hE B < hP B , (b) hE B D

hEP , (c) hEE > hEP .
  
B B B

Solution
The answer is (b). The reason for this is that the angular momentum about a generic moment center is equal
to the angular momentum of the body computed with respect to the mass center plus the moment of the
linear momentum of the body viewed as a vector applied at the mass center relative to the moment center
in question. The body shown is in a fixed axis rotation about the mass center. This implies that the linear
momentum of the body is equal to zero. In turn, this means that the angular momentum of the body about any
moment center is simply equal to the angular momentum computed about the mass center. In other words,
in a fixed axis rotation about the mass center, the angular momentum of the body is the same no matter the
choice of moment center.

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1209

Problem 8.101

The weights of the uniform thin pin-connected bars AB, BC, and CD are
WAB D 4 lb, WBC D 6:5 lb, and WCD D 10 lb, respectively. Letting  D 47 ,
R D 2 ft, L D 3:5 ft, and H D 4:5 ft, and knowing that bar AB rotates at a
constant angular velocity !AB D 4 rad=s, compute the angular momentum of
the system about D at the instant shown.

Solution

The angular momentum of the system about D is the sum of the


angular momenta about D of the individual components of the
system. Hence, letting hED denote the angular momentum about D
of the system as a whole, we have

hED D hED AB C hED BC C hED CD ;


  
(1)

where, letting E and F denote the mass centers of AB and BC , respectively, and observing that bar CD is
in a fixed axis rotation about D, we have

hED AB D IE !EAB C rEE=D  mAB vEE ; hED BC D IF !EBC C rEF =D  mBC vEF ; hED CD D ID !E CD ; (2)
  

where IE is the mass moment of inertia of bar AB with respect to its own mass center, !EAB D !AB kO is the
angular velocity of bar AB, rEE=D is the position of E relative to D, vEE is the velocity of E; IF is the mass
moment of inertia of bar BC with respect to its own mass center, !EBC D !BC kO is the angular velocity of
bar BC , rEF =D is the position of F relative to D, vEF is the velocity of F ; ID is the mass moment of inertia
of bar BC relative to its own rotation center D, and !E CD D !CD kO is the angular velocity of bar CD.
We now proceed to determine all the contributions to the terms in Eqs. (2), beginning with the relative
position vectors:
1
rEE=D D .H cos  C L/ {O C .H sin  2 R/ |O and rEF =D D .H cos  C 12 L/ {O C H sin  |O: (3)

For the velocity of point E we can write

vEE D vEA C !EAB  rEE=A ; (4)

where
E
vEA D 0; rEE=A D 12 R |O; and O
!EAB D !AB k; (5)
so that we have
1
vEE D 2 !AB R {O: (6)
Next, observing that rEB=A D R |O, we must also have

vEB D vEA C !EAB  rEB=A D !AB R {O: (7)

Now, notice that we can compute the velocity of C in the following two ways:

vEC D vEB C !EBC  rEC =B and vEC D vED C !E CD  rEC =D ; (8)

where
O
!EBC D !BC k; rEC =B D L {O; E
vED D 0; O
!E CD D !CD k; rEC =D D H. cos  {O C sin  |O/: (9)
August 10, 2009
1210 Solutions Manual

Substituting the result in Eq. (7) along with Eqs. (9) into Eqs. (8), carrying out the cross products, and
enforcing equality between the two expressions for vEC , we have

R!AB {O C L!BC |O D H !CD sin  {O H !CD cos  |O: (10)

Equation (10) is a vector equation corresponding to two scalar equations in the two unknowns !BC and !CD
whose solution is
R!AB cos  R!AB
!BC D and !CD D : (11)
L sin  H sin 
We now observe that rEF =B D 21 L {O and that rEG=D D 1
2 H. cos  {O C sin  |O/. Using these expressions,
we can then say
R!AB cos 
vEF D vEB C !EBC  rEF =B D R!AB {O |O; (12)
2 sin 
where we have used the expressions of vEB in Eq. (7), of vED in the third of Eqs. (9), as well as the first of
Eqs. (11).
Letting g denote the acceleration due to gravity, the mass properties of each bar can be summarized as
follows:
WAB 1 WAB 2
mAB D D 0:1242 slug; IE D R D 0:04141 slugft2 ; (13)
g 12 g
WBC 1 WBC 2
mBC D D 0:2019 slug; IF D L D 0:2061 slugft2 ; (14)
g 12 g
1 WCD 2 WCD
ID D H C .H=2/2 D 2:096 slugft2 ; (15)
12 g g

where we have used the following numerical data: WAB D 4 lb, g D 32:2 ft=s2 , R D 2 ft, WBC D 6:5 lb,
L D 3:5 ft, WCD D 10 lb, and H D 4:5 ft.
We are now ready to evaluate the angular momenta about D due to each bar. Substituting into the first of
Eqs. (2) the last of Eq. (5), the first of Eqs. (3), and Eq. (6), carrying out the cross product and simplifying,
we have
hED AB D 14 !AB 4IE C mAB R.2H sin  R/ kO D .1:304 ftlbs/ k; O
  
(16)
where we have used the fact that !AB D 4 rad=s, mAB and IE are given by Eqs. (13), R D 2 ft, H D 4:5 ft,
and  D 47 . Similarly, substituting into the second of Eqs. (2) all the required expressions, we have
 
R!AB mBC L.2H cos  C L/ 4IF cos 
E kO D .8:506 ftlbs/ k;
O

hD AB D (17)
4L sin 

where we have used the values in Eqs. (14) and R D 2 ft, !AB D 4 rad=s, L D 3:5 ft, H D 4:5 ft, and
 D 47 . Finally, substituting into the last of Eqs. (2) all the required expressions, we have
ID R!AB O
hED O

AB
D k D .5:095 ftlbs/ k; (18)
H sin 

where we have used the value of ID in Eq. (15) and R D 2 ft, !AB D 4 rad=s, H D 4:5 ft, and  D 47 .
Hence, summing the contributions computed in the last three equations, we have

hED D .14:9 ftlbs/ kO :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1211

Problem 8.102

Consider Prob. 8.55 on p. 637 in which an eccentric wheel B is spun from rest under
the action of a known torque M . In that problem, it was said that the wheel was in the
horizontal plane. Is it possible to solve Prob. 8.55 by just applying Eq. (8.44) on p. 627 if
the wheel is in the vertical plane? Why?

Solution
The answer is no. In fact, if point O is chosen as moment center, the contribution to the time integral of
the moment of the external forces about O due to the reactions at O would be equal to zero. However, not
enough information is provided for calculating the contribution due to gravity. If G is chosen as moment
center, the moment due to gravity about G is equal to zero. However, not enough information is provided to
compute the time integral of the moment about O due to the reactions at O. Any other choice of moment
center would combine the two cases already discussed.

August 10, 2009


1212 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.103

The uniform disk A, of mass mA D 1:2 kg and radius rA D 0:25 m, is mounted


on a vertical shaft that can translate along the horizontal rod E. The uniform
disk B, of mass mB D 0:85 kg and radius rB D 0:38 m, is mounted on a
vertical shaft that is rigidly attached to E. Disk C has a negligible mass and
is rigidly attached to E; i.e., C and E form a single rigid body. Disk A can
rotate about the axis `A , disk B can rotate about the axis `B , and the arm E
along with C can rotate about the fixed axis `C . While keeping both B and C
stationary, disk A is initially spun with !A D 1200 rpm. Disk A is then brought
in contact with C (contact is maintained via a spring), and at the same time,
both B and C (and the arm E) are free to rotate. Due to friction between A
and C , C along with E and disk B start spinning. Eventually A and C will
stop slipping relative to one another. Disk B always rotates without slip over
C . Let d D 0:27 m and w D 0:95 m. Assuming that the only elements of the
system that have mass are A, B, and E and that mE D 0:3 kg, and assuming
that all friction in the system can be neglected except for that between A and
C and between C and B, determine the angular speeds of A, B, and C (the
angular velocity of C is the same as that of E since they form a single rigid
body), when A and C stop slipping relative to one another.

Solution
Note: The value of the rB in the problem statement is incorrect. Here we will set rB D 0:18 m.
We let the subscripts 1 and 2 denote the time instants at which the wheels are
first brought into contact and when slip between the wheels stops, respectively.
The figure on the right is a top view of the FBD of the system. Because the
system is freely rotating, choosing as our moment center the fixed point O, we
see that there are no external moments acting on the system and therefore the
total angular momentum of the system about O, hEO , must be conserved, i.e.,

hEO1 D hEO2 (1)

To compute hEO , we write it as the sum of three contributions due A, B, and E (disk C does not contribute
because its mass is being neglected), respectively,

hEO D .hEO /A C .hEO /B C .hEO /E ; (2)

where, recalling that E is in a fixed axis rotation about O with angular velocity !E C (since E and C form a
single rigid body), we have

.hEO /A D IQ !EA C rEQ=O  mA vEQ ; .hEO /B D IP !EB C rEP =O  mB vEP ; .hEO /E D IO !E C ; (3)

where IQ is the mass moment of inertia A about its mass center Q, and IP is the mass moment of inertia of
B about its mass center P , and IO is the mass moment of inertia of E about O:

IQ D 21 mA rA2 D 0:03750 kgm2 ; IP D 21 mB rB2 D 0:01377 kgm2 ;


1 2 1
2
IO D 12 mE w C mE 2w d D 0:03517 kgm2 (4)

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1213

where we have used the following numerical data: mA D 1:2 kg, rA D 0:025 m, mB D 0:85 kg, rB D 0:18 m,
mE D 0:3 kg, w D 0:95 m, and d D 0:27 m. Going back to the solution of the problem, from Eqs. (3) we
see that the key to the solution is expressing all the velocity terms at times t1 and t2 .
At time t1 B and E are at rest while A is spinning with vEQ1 D 0. E Therefore, referring to Eqs. (3), at time
t1 we have
.hEO1 /A D IQ !A1 k;
O .hEO1 /B D 0;
E and .hEO1 /E D 0; E (5)
where we have set !EA D !A1 k, O and where !A1 D 1200 rpm D 125:7 rad=s.
We now observe that points P and Q move with the arm E. Recalling that E forms a single rigid body
O
with disk C and that the center of rotation of such a body is the fixed point O, so that !E E D !E C D !C k,
using rigid body kinematics at time t2 we have
O
!EA2 D !A2 k; vEQ2 D !E C 2  rEQ=O D !C 2 kO  .rA C rC / uO r D !C 2 .rA C rC / uO  (6)
!EB2 D !B2 kO vEP 2 D !E C 2  rEP =O D !C 2 kO  .rB C rC / uO r D !C 2 .rB C rC / uO  ; (7)
where we have used the fact that
rEQ=O D .rA C rC / uO r and rEP =O D .rB C rC / uO r : (8)
Substituting Eqs. (6) into Eqs. (3), and using Eqs. (8), at time t2 we have
.hEO2 /A D IQ !A2 C mA .rA C rC /2 !C 2 kO and .hEO2 /B D IP !B2 C mB .rB C rC /2 !C 2 k:
O
   
(9)

Then, using Eqs. (2), (5), and (9), and recalling that .hEO2 /E D IO !C 2 k,
O Eq. (1) can be rewritten as

IQ !A1 D IQ !A2 C IP !B2 C IO C mA .rA C rC /2 C mB .rB C rC /2 !C 2 ;


 
(10)
where we have written only the component of the equation since it is the only nonzero component of the
corresponding vector equation.
Observe that Eq. (10) is a single scalar equation in the three unknowns !A2 , !B2 ,
and !C 2 . To find the two additional equations we need, We recall that at t2 the
disks A and B no longer slip relative to C . Referring to the figure on the right,
these two rolling without slip conditions imply vEH 2 D vEH 0 2 and vEF 2 D vEF 0 2 ,
where points H and H 0 belong to C and A, respectively, and points F and F 0
belong to C and B respectively.
Applying rigid body kinematics, at time t2 we have
vEH 2 D vEH 0 2 ) !E C 2  rEH=O D vEQ2 C !EA2  rEH 0 =Q ) !C 2 rC D .rA C rC /!C 2 rA !A2 ; (11)
vEF 2 D vEF 0 2 ) !E C 2  rEF =O D vEP 2 C !EB2  rEF 0 =P ) !C 2 rC D .rB C rC /!C 2 C rB !B2 ; (12)
where we have used Eqs. (6) and (7) and the fact that the only nonzero component of Eqs. (11) and (11) is the
 component.
We now observe that Eq. (10), (11), and (12) form a system of three equations in the three unknowns
!A2 , !B2 , and !C 2 , whose solution is
IQ !A1
!A2 D !B2 D !C 2 D : (13)
IO C IP C IQ C mA .rA C rC /2 C mB .rB C rC /2
Therefore, the problems answer is

j!A jafter slip stops D j!B jafter slip stops D j!C jafter slip stops D 16:4 rad=s;

where we have used the values of IO , IP , and IQ in Eqs. (4), and where we have used the following numerical
data: !A1 D 1200 rpm D 125:7 rad=s, mA D 1:2 kg, rA D 0:025 m, rB D 0:18 m, and rC D d rB D
0:09000 m (given that d D 0:27 m).
August 10, 2009
1214 Solutions Manual

Problem 8.104

A billiard ball is rolling without slipping with a speed v0 D 6 ft=s as shown


when it hits the rail. According to regulations, the nose of the rail is at a height
from the table bed of 63.5% of the balls diameter (i.e., `=.2r/ D 0:635/.
Model the impact with the rail as perfectly elastic, neglect friction between
the ball and the rail as well as between the ball and the table, and neglect
any vertical motion of the ball. Based on the stated assumptions, determine
the velocity of the point of contact between the ball and the table right after
impact. The diameter of the ball is 2r D 2:25 in:, and the weight of the ball is
W D 5:5 oz.

Solution
The impact-relevant FBD is shown to the right. Based on the stated
assumptions, the angular momentum about the center of the ball is
conserved, so that we have
v0
IG !b D IG !bC ) !bC D !b D ; (1)
r
where !EB D !b kO is the angular velocity of the ball and where we
have accounted for the fact that the ball is rolling without slip before
impact. Observe that the LOI for this impact is oriented by unit
vector uO s , which is defined via the angle  .
The angle  is found by observing that
 
` r 1 ` r
sin  D )  D sin : (2)
r r
The COR equation for this problem is
C
vQs D evQs ; (3)
where Q is the point on the ball that comes into contact with the nose of the tables rail and where we have
assumed that the table does not move. Due to rigid body kinematics, we have that vEQ D vEG C !E b  rEQ=G .
Using the xy coordinate system shown, this kinematic relation is expressed as
vEQ D vGx {O C !b kO  . r uO s /; (4)
where we have accounted for the fact that G can only move in the x direction, and where
uO s D cos  {O sin  |O: (5)
Using Eqs. (4) and (5) together, for we can then state that
C C
vEQs D v0 cos  and vEQs D vGx cos : (6)
C
Substituting Eq. (6) into Eq. (3) and solving for vGx , we obtain that
C
vGx D v0 : (7)
Letting P be the point of contact between the table and the ball, recalling that v0 D 6 ft=s, and recalling that
we must have vEP D vEG C !E b  rEP =G , with rEP =G D r |O, we then have

vEPC D 2v0 {O D .12 ft=s/ {O :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1215

Problem 8.105

A basketball with mass m D 0:6 kg is rolling without slipping as shown when


it hits a small step with ` D 7 cm. Letting the balls diameter be r D 12:0 cm,
modeling the ball as a thin spherical shell (the mass moment of inertia of a
spherical shell about its mass center is 23 mr 2 ), and assuming that the ball does
not rebound off the step or slip relative to it, determine the maximum value of
v0 for which the ball will roll over the step without losing contact with it.

Solution
The solution is organized in three parts. In the first, we consider the collision between the ball and the step. In
the second, we apply the work-energy principle to relate the postimpact angular speed of the ball to the balls
change in elevation in reaching the top of the step. In the third part we will relate the value of the angular
speed in question to the condition that would be met if the ball were to lose contact with the top of the step.
The impact-relevant FBD of the ball is shown on the right. This FBD indicates
that the impact is a constrained impact in which the ball behaves as if hinged
at the fixed point O right after impact. Since point O is fixed, we can conclude
that the impact is governed by the conservation of angular momentum about O.
Keeping in mind that the vertical component of the velocity of G is equal to zero
before impact, we have

IG !b mb .r `/vGx D IO !bC ; (1)

where !E b D !b kO is the angular velocity of the ball, and where IG and IO are the mass moments of inertia
of the ball relative to points G and O, respectively. Specifically, we have

IG D 23 mb r 2 and IO D IG C mb r 2 D 53 mb r 2 : (2)

Since G is moving with speed v0 to the right and the ball rolls without slip before impact, we must have

vGx D v0 and !b D v0 =r: (3)

Hence, substituting Eqs. (2) and (3) into Eq. (1) and solving for !bC , we have

5r 3`
!bC D v0 : (4)
5r 2

We now consider the second part of the problem. We define to coincide with
the postimpact position of the system, and we define to be the position of
the ball after it barely makes it to the top of the step. The FBD for this part of
the problem is shown on the right. Since the the ball moves as if hinged at O,
the only force doing work is gravity and therefore we can write

T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (5)
where, given our choice of datum, that the ball is in a state of fixed axis rotation about O after impact, we
have
2
T1 D 12 IO !b1 D 56 mb r 2 .!bC /2 ; V1 D 0; 2
T2 D 21 IO !b2 D 65 mb r 2 !b2
2
; V2 D mb g`: (6)
August 10, 2009
1216 Solutions Manual

Recalling that !bC is given in Eq. (4), substituting Eqs. (6) into Eq. (5), and solving for !b2 we have
s
.5r 3`/2 v02 6g`
!b2 D : (7)
25r 4 5r 2

The expression of the angular speed in Eq. (7) is computed under the assumption that the
ball makes it to the top of the step by rolling over the edge of the step, i.e., by not losing
contact with the edge of the step. We now consider the limiting case where the contact
force between the edge of the step and the ball becomes equal to zero as the ball reaches
the top of the step. The FBD describing this condition is shown on the right, where we
have chosen to use a normal-tangential component system attached the the balls mass
center G. Notice that it is assumed that the ball is still rotating about the fixed point O,
which, at the instant considered, is vertically aligned with G.
Using the FBD in question and summing forces in the normal direction, we have
X
Fn W mb g D mb .aGn /2 ; (8)

where, as long at the ball is still in a rotation about O, we have


2
vG2 2 .5r 3`/2 v02 6g`
.aGn /2 D D r!b2 D ; (9)
r 25r 3 5r
where we have used teh expression for !b2 in Eq. (7). Substituting Eq. (9) into Eq. (8) and solving for v0 , we
obtain the maximum value of v0 such that the ball will not lose contact with the step. Letting such value of
v0 be denoted by .v0 /max , we have

s
5r 2 .5r C 6`/g
.v0 /max D D 2:18 m=s;
.5r 3`/2

where we have used the following numerical data: r D 12 cm D 0:1200 m, ` D 7 cm D 0:07000 m, and
g D 9:81 m=s2 .

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1217

Problem 8.106

A bullet B weighing 147 gr (1 lb D 7000 gr) is fired with a speed v0 D 2750 ft=s
as shown against a thin uniform rod A of length ` D 3 ft, weight Wr D 35 lb, and
pinned at O. If d D 1:5 ft and the COR for the impact is e D 0:25, determine the
bars angular velocity immediately after the impact. In addition, determine the
maximum value of the angle  to which the bar swings after impact.

Solution

From the impact-relevant FBD of the system we see that the angular momentum of the
system about O is conserved. Since the bar A is initially at rest and since its motion
must be a fixed axis rotation about O, the conservation of angular momentum of the
system about O can be written as follows:
C
mB v0 d D mB vBx d C IO !AC ; (1)

where mB is the mass of B, we have accounted for the fact that vBx D v0 , !EA D !A kO
is the angular velocity of the bar, and IO is the mass moment of inertia of A relative to O, i.e.,
 2
2 `
IO D 1
12 mr ` C mr D 13 mr `2: (2)
2
Observing that the LOI is parallel to the horizontal direction, the COR equation for this problem is
C C
vBx vQx D ev0 ; (3)

where point Q is the point on the bar that his hit by the bullet, and where, again, we have taken into account
the fact that A is initially at rest (i.e., vQx D 0). Since A is constrained to rotate about O, we must have that

C
vQx D !AC d: (4)

The equation that results from substituting Eq. (4) into Eq. (3), together with Eq. (1) form a system of two
C
equations in the two unknowns vBx and !AC whose solution is

C 3d 2 mB e`2 mr 3d 2 WB e`2 Wr
vQx D v 0 D v0 D 686:0 ft=s (5)
3d 2 mB C `2 mr 3d 2 WB C `2 Wr
and
3d.mB C e mr / 3d.WB C eWr /
!AC D 2 2
v0 D v0 D 1:031 rad=s; (6)
3d mB C ` mr 3d 2 WB C `2 Wr
where we have first replaced the masses with the corresponding weights by multiplying both the numerators
and the denominators by g, namely the acceleration due to gravity, and where obtained numerical values
by using the following data: d D 1:5 ft, WB D 147 gr D 0:02100 lb, e D 0:25, ` D 3 ft, Wr D 35 lb, and
v0 D 2750 ft=s. Expressing the result in Eq. (6) in vector form and to 3 significant figures, we have

!EAC D .1:03 rad=s/ kO :

August 10, 2009


1218 Solutions Manual

Now, to determine the maximum swing angle of the bar A, we can apply the
work energy principle. An FBD of the bar between the post-impact position
and the position with the maximum swing angle is shown to the right. The post-
impact position is denoted by whereas the position of the bar corresponding
to the maximum angle  is denoted as . Observe that only gravity does work
on the bar in going from to . Hence, choosing the datum for gravity at ,
we have
T1 C V1 D T2 C V2 ; (7)
where

T1 D 12 IO .!AC /2 ; V1 D 0; T2 D 0; V2 D mr g.`=2/.1 cos max /; (8)


where the bar achieves max at . Substituting Eq. (8) into Eq. (7) yields an equation for max whose solution
is
IO .!AC /2 `.!AC /2
   
1 1
max D cos 1 D cos 1 ; (9)
mr g` 3g
where, to obtain the last expression, we have used the result in Eq. (2). Using the value of !AC in Eq. (6) and
recalling that ` D 3 ft and g D 32:2 ft=s2 , we have

max D 14:8 :

August 10, 2009


Dynamics 1e 1219

Problem 8.107

An airplane is about to crash-land with a vertical component of speed v0 D


2 ft=s and zero roll, pitch, and yaw. Determine the vertical component of
velocity of the center of mass of the airplane G as well as the airplanes angular
velocity immediately after touching down, assuming that (1) the only available
landing gear is rigid and rigidly attached to the airplane, (2) the coefficient
of restitution between the landing gear and the ground is e D 0:1, (3) the
airplane can be modeled as a rigid body, (4) the mass center G and the point
of first contact between the landing gear and the ground are in the same plane
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the airplane, and (5) friction between
the landing gear and the ground is negligible. In solving the problem use the
following data: W D 2500 lb (weight of the airplane), G is the mass center of
the airplane, kG D 3 ft is the radius of gyration of the airplane, and d D 5:08 ft.

Solution

We model the airplanes touchdown as a constrained impact. the


impact-relevant FBD is shown on the right where P is the point on
the airplane that comes into contact with the ground and point O is
the (fixed) point on the ground that is first struck by the plane. Based
on the FBD, we can invoke conservation of angular momentum of the
airplane about O. This gives
C
IG !p C mdvGy D IG !pC C mdvGy ; (1)

where IG is the mass moment of inertia of the airplane relative to its own mass center, !Ep D !p kO is the
angular velocity of the airplane, vEG D vGx {O C vGy |O is the velocity of G. The mass moment of inertia IG is
given by
2
IG D mkG : (2)
Next, we write the coefficient of restitution equation for point P . Keeping in mind that the ground is stationary
and that the LOI is parallel to the vertical direction, this equation takes on the form

vPCy D evP y : (3)

Next, we recall that due to the stated conditions before impact, we must have

!p D 0; vGy D v0 ; vP y D v0 ; (4)

where the last of Eqs. (4) is due to the fact that before impact the airplane is simply translating. Since P and
G belong to the same rigid body, we must also have

vEPC D vEG
C
C !EpC  rEP =G ) vEPC D vGx
C C
{O C vGy |O C !pC kO  . d {O h |O/

rEP =G
C C C
) C
vEP D .vGx C h!p / {O C .vGy C
d!p / |O ) vPCy D vGy
C
d!pC : (5)

Substituting Eq. (2) and the first two of Eqs. (4) into Eq. (1), and symplifying we have
2 C C
dv0 D kG !p C dvGy : (6)
August 10, 2009
1220 Solutions Manual

Substituting the last of Eqs. (4) and the last of Eqs. (5) into Eq. (3), we have
C
vGy d!pC D ev0 : (7)

Equations (6) and (7) for a system of to equations in two unknowns whose solution is
2
C
d2 ekG .1 C e/dv0
vGy D 2
v0 and !pC D 2
; (8)
d2 C kG d 2 C kG

which can be evaluated to obtain

C
vGy D 1:43 ft=s and !EpC D . 0:321 rad=s/ kO ;

where we have used the following numerical data: d D 5:08 ft, e D 0:1, kG D 3 ft, and v0 D 2 ft=s.

August 10, 2009

You might also like